Omron NT31 Series Setup Manual

Cat. No. V062-E1-03
NT31 and NT31C
Programmable Terminals
SETUP MANUAL
NT31and NT31C
Programmable Terminals
Setup Manual
Revised June 2004
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
! WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
! Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
!
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Preparing for Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Hardware Settings and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (-V Versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -V Suffix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port . . . . . . .
4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port . . . .
5-1
5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 6
System Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches . . . . . . .
Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xii
xii
xii
1
2
4
15
16
19
21
23
24
27
29
30
33
34
35
37
45
51
52
83
84
98
129
131
132
133
138
148
153
155
166
166
186
189
219
225
228
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
230
233
239
243
Appendices
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting and Storing the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relationship between System Program and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
247
255
259
265
267
269
271
273
275
279
285
289
293
About this Manual:
This manual describes connecting the NT-series NT31 and NT31C Programmable Terminals to a PLC
(Programmable Controller) or other host and peripheral devices and the settings required for communications and applications. It includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting
to install and operate the Programmable Terminal.
Section 1 provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs, types of connection, communication methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the
PTs.
Section 2 describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs, and the functions of the parts
of PTs, as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.
Section 3 describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices.
Section 4 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.
Section 5 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.
Section 6 describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start the PT. Functions that are convenient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also
explained here.
Section 7 describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT, and how to carry out maintenance and
inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors.
The Appendices provide specifications, dimensions, procedures for using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit, procedures for transporting and storing the PT, information on cable preparation, information
on the relationship between the system program and hardware, and product lists.
! WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
ix
Related Manuals:
Related manuals are listed below.
The symbol at the end of the catalog number is the revision number.
Connecting and Setting Up the Programmable Terminal
NT31 and NT31C PT Setup Manual (V062-E1-, this manual)
This manual describes connecting the Programmable Terminals to a host and
peripheral devices and settings required for communications and applications.
The functions and actual operating methods for the NT31 and NT31C PTs are
provided in the Reference Manual (V064-E1-).
Programmable Terminal Functions and Operation
NT31/31C/631/631C PT Reference Manual (V064-E1-)
This manual is used for any of the following PTs: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C. It describes screen configurations, part functions, host control methods, and other application information.
PT connection and setup procedures are described in the NT31 and NT31C PT
Setup Manual (V062-E1-).
Creating and Transferring Screen Data, and Installing the System Program
NT-series Support Tool for Windows Ver. 4.1 Operation Manual (V061-E1-)
The screens displayed on the NT31 and NT31C PTs are created with the Support
Tool and transferred to the PT. This manual describes how to create and transfer
screen data. It also describes how to download a system program to a PT using
the System Installer.
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows is normally referred to as merely the
Support Tool.
Connecting to Controllers Not Made by OMRON
PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-)
The NT31 and NT31C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following series: Mitsubishi A Series and FX Series. This manual describes the connection
and setup methods for these controllers.
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows Version 4.1 is required to connect the
NT31 and NT31C PTs to these controllers.
NT31/NT631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-)
The NT31 and NT31C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following series: Allen-Bradley SLC 500 Series, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Siemens S7-300 and S7-400 Series. This manual describes the connection and setup methods for these controllers.
x
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Terminal. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a
Programmable Terminal.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
xii
xii
xi
3
Safety Precautions
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal. Be sure
to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual
close at hand for reference during operation.
! WARNING It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be
used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in
applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult
with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to
the above-mentioned applications.
! WARNING Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where
danger to human life or serious damage is possible, or for emergency switch
applications.
3
Safety Precautions
Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them
before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and correctly.
Safety Conventions
andtheir Meanings
This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate
cautions, warnings, and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the NT31/31C.
The cautions, warnings, and dangers shown here contain important information
related to safety. The instructions in these cautions, warnings, and dangers must
be observed.
! WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
! Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
xii
3
Safety Precautions
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any
internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of
these may result in electrical shock.
WARNING
Switch OFF the NT31/NT31C power before replacing the
backlight. Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not touch the backlight immediately after switching OFF
the power supply.
Otherwise burn injuries may result due to the high
temperatures.
xiii
SECTION 1
General
This section provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs, types of connection, communication methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the PTs.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1 Operation of an NT31/NT31C at an FA Production Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2 Operations of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Comparison between NT31 and NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4 Comparison between NT30/NT30C and NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-5 Principal Functions of NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-6 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2 Connecting to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1 Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2 Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3 NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-4 Connecting to other Companies’ PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1 Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
8
10
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
19
19
19
20
20
21
1
Section
Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C
1-1
1-1
Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C
The NT31/NT31C is a sophisticated display unit (programmable terminal) which
automatically displays information and can also be used for operations when
necessary. The following gives a general description of the role and operation of
the NT31/NT31C for those using a programmable terminal (PT) for the first time.
1-1-1 Operation of an NT31/NT31C at an FA Production Site
Production Line Status
Monitoring
The NT31/NT31C displays real-time information about the system and equipment operating status, etc. Its power of expression is enhanced by graphs and
other visuals, making the displays easy to understand.
Production Control (3)
Product
Today’s target
Current production
Number defective
Number repaired
560
305
2
7
441
275
8
15
% achieved
Directions to Workers on
the Shop Floor
The NT31/NT31C warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the appropriate remedial action.
Alarm
Assembly line B
Positioning pin
is defective. Line stopped.
Check the following.
1. Defective pin L3
2. Position of dog M2
3. Mounting of photosensor P5
Panel Switch Functions
Setting touch switches on the NT31/NT31C allows workers to use the
NT31/NT31C as an operating panel; the results of the operations are transmitted to the host.
Electroplating control
Transport
Electr.
head
Wash.
head
Corr. prv.
head
Electrolyte
Wash
Corr.
prv.fluid
Clamp
Unclamp
Adv.
Int. stop
Rev.
2
Section
Role and Operation of the NT31/NT31C
1-1
1-1-2 Operations of the NT31/NT31C
Displays Screens
The information to be displayed (screen data) can be created on a computer using the Support Tool and stored in the NT31/NT31C. The screen data can be
displayed on the NT31/NT31C in response to instructions from the host or touch
switch operation.
Host
The screen data designated by
instructions from the host or touch
switch operation is displayed.
Receives Data from a
Host
The NT31/NT31C can be connected to the host by a host link or NT link and receive necessary data from the host.
Host link, NT link
Sends Data to a Host
Host
Data input using the touch panel (switch ON/OFF statuses, numeric values,
character strings) can be transmitted to the host.
Host
Touch panel
ON/OFF information, numeric
data, etc.
Screen Data
The screen data to be displayed on the NT31/NT31C can be created on a personal computer using the Support Tool. Connect the NT31/NT31C to the personal computer with an RS-232C cable and transmit the screen data to the
NT31/NT31C.
Create screen data.
RS-232C
Personal
computer
(Support Tool)
Screen data
When the host is connected at serial port A,
the personal computer is only connected
when communicating screen data between
the NT31/NT31C and Support Tool.
3
Section
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
1-2
1-2
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
The NT31/NT31C has the following features.
1-2-1 Features
Downsized Body
• Slim body (50 mm or less in the panel*).
• The communication cable connectors are housed in the unit so that they do not
protrude from the unit.
* When mounted in a panel of the recommended thickness (page 30).
Construction Best Suited to the FA Environment
• The panel is an STN monochrome LCD type with backlight for the NT31 and an
STN color LCD type with backlight for the NT31C.
• The backlight unit and battery can be replaced at the operation site.
• Waterproofed equivalent to the NEMA4 standard and to IP65F*.
* The panel may not be usable in environments where it is exposed to oil for long
periods.
320 dots
POWER
RUN
240 dots
Wide angle of visibility
Touch Switch Operation
Compatibility with Other PTs
Contrast and brightness are adjustable by touch switch operations.
• There is upward compatibility between the NT31/NT31C and the following
models for screen data and user programs: NT11S, NT20S, NT30, NT30C,
NT600S, NT610G, NT610C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631. (After being read to the Support Tool, screens must be modified in accordance
with the screen size. Depending on the function used, partial modification of
programs may also be necessary. For details on the compatibility of screen
data, refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual and the NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual.
• The dimensions of the panel cut-out to accommodate the NT31/NT31C are the
same as for the NT30/NT30C.
Two Ports Featured as Standard:
Port A for Common Use by Support Tool/Host and Port B for Exclusive Use by the Host
• Communication with the host is possible via another port while connected to
the Support Tool.
• Reading bar code data from a bar code reader is possible via another port
while communicating with the host.
Rapid System Program & Screen Data Changes Possible Using a Memory Unit
• Installing a memory unit (type NT-MF261) on the rear of the NT31/NT31C
makes it easy to write screen data into the NT31/NT31C on site. This enables a
rapid response to setup changes.
• NT31/NT31C can store a system program into a memory unit. This enables the
system to handle more flexible setups.
4
Section
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
1-2
Screen Data Check
Function
Screen data can be checked simply by operations at the NT31/NT31C system
menu, without connecting up to the Support Tool.
Increased Screen Data
Capacity
The data capacity of 1 MB is twice that of the NT30/NT30C, enabling storage of a
larger quantity of screen data.
Large Increase in
Maximum Number of
Registered Elements
The number of elements that can be registered on one screen has been considerably increased, making it possible to create more expressive screens. For details, refer to Display Restrictions in Appendix A Specifications of the
NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
Binary Data can be Read
to/Written from the Host
It is now possible to write binary data stored in words at the host directly to the
NT31/NT31C. This makes data conversion by a program at the host unnecessary, reducing the load on the host.
Character Display Using
High Definition Fonts
Any quadrupled characters are displayed with a 32 dot high-definition font.
Simple Version Upgrades
By using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool (Type NTZJCAT1-EV4), the system program at the NT31/NT31C can be changed easily
from a personal computer.
Complies with
International Standards
The NT31/NT31C meets UL/CSA standards and EC directives.
Compatible with Other
Vendors’ Devices
Compatible with Sequencers in the following series: Mitsubishi A-series (Calculator Link) and FX-series (Programming Console), Allen-Bradley SLC 500 Series, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Siemens S7-300 and S7-400 Series. Specialized system programs can be installed that allow the NT31/NT31C
to be controlled from other companies’ Sequencers.
Multiple Windows
Up to 3 windows can be displayed simultaneously in the normal screen. A
9-word window control area has been allocated to the host; the contents of these
9 words can be changed from the Host to open, close, and move windows.
1-2-2 Comparison between NT31 and NT31C
Two NT31 models — the NT31, which is capable of versatile graphic displays,
and the NT31C, which is also capable of color display — are available. The differences between the NT31 and NT31C are tabled below:
Function
NT31
NT31C
Type
NT31-ST121-EV2 (Beige)
NT31-ST121B-EV2 (Black)
NT31-ST122-EV2 (Beige)
NT31-ST122B-EV2 (Black)
NT31C-ST141-EV2 (Beige)
NT31C-ST141B-EV2 (Black)
NT31C-ST142-EV2 (Beige)
NT31C-ST142B-EV2 (Black)
Display panel
STN monochrome LCD display
type (with white backlight)
STN color LCD type
(with white backlight)
Beige and black are the front panel colors of each NT31/NT31C types.
1-2-3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions
The V2 versions of NT31/NT31C are supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
High-speed 1:N NT Link
The V2 versions are compatible with the high-speed 1:N NT Link as well as the
earlier standard 1:N NT Link.
Additional Mathematical
Functions
Operands (values referenced by formula) can be registered to allow the PT to
perform calculations automatically and write the results of those calculations to
numeral memory tables or words in the host.
Device Monitor Function
The new device monitor function can be used to change the PLC’s operating
mode or display/change values in the PLC’s memory areas. The present values
(PVs) of several words can be listed with the device monitor.
5
Section
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
1-2
Interlock Function
PT operations and inputs can be disabled from the PLC if interlock bits have
been allocated in the PLC for the corresponding PT touch switches, numeric inputs, or string inputs.
Improved Lamp/Touch
Switch Labels
The following displays can be performed with lamp or touch switch labels:
• Display several lines of labels.
• Switch the display between different labels when OFF and ON.
• Display the numeral memory table contents as labels.
• Display the string memory table contents as labels.
NT30/NT30C and
NT620S/NT620C/NT625C
Emulation
The word configuration of the PT status control area and PT status notify area
can be set to emulate those of the NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/NT625C;
this mode is called NT30/620 compatible mode.
When the PT is operating in NT30/620 compatible mode, it will be equivalent to
an NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/NT625C in the functions listed below. The
PT retains full V2 functionality in all functions other than the ones listed below.
Refer to Appendix C in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual for more details.
• Word configuration and functions of the PT status control area and PT status
notify area
• Image/library codes
• Insertion of image/library data into character strings
Additional CS-series
Data Areas Accessible
Data areas in CS-series PLCs that were previously inaccessible can be accessed. The data areas listed below can be accessed (read/written).
All banks in the EM area, timer completion flags (TU), counter completion
flags (CU), Work areas (WR), Task flags (TK), and the HR area.
Recipe Function
You can set the data (numeric values) for multiple words in record units using the
tabular elements on the PT screen, and write these settings in a single operation
to words on the host (i.e., PLC or PT memory) using a touch switch operation on
the PT Unit. Also, multiple words of numeric data can be read from the host in
one operation. In this way, groups of parameter settings can be edited at the PT
Unit, and written to or read from the host.
Adjusting Contrast and
Brightness During PT
Operation
You can display the brightness and contrast adjustment screen using either the
touch switch or commands from the host, even while the PT is in operation.
1-2-4 Comparison between NT30/NT30C and NT31/NT31C
Item
NT30/NT30C
NT31/NT31C
Support Tool used
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 or NT-ZA3AT-EV2
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
DIP switches
On rear of unit
None (software settings)
Use of B7A unit
Possible
Not possible
Use of memory unit
Not possible
Possible
RS-232C interface
Connector (9-pin) also used as port for
screen data transfer.
- Serial port A connector (also used
for screen data transfer, 9-pin)
- Serial port B connector (for host
communications only, 25-pin)
RS-422A/485 interface
Terminal block
Serial port B (25-pin D-SUB connector)
Backlight color
White/red (selectable)
White only
Replacement backlight
NT30-CFL01/NT30C-CFL01
NT31C-CFL01
(NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141EV2 (same for both models).
The backlight for the
NT31-ST122-EV2/NT31C-ST142EV2 cannot be replaced by the user.)
6
Section
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
Item
NT30/NT30C
1-2
NT31/NT31C
NT31/NT31C system program data
NT-ZS3AT-EV1
(including system installer)
The system installer and system program data are supplied with the Support Tool.
High-speed 1:N NT Link
Not possible
Possible*1
Memory
y Link
System program
Exclusive use by Memory Link
Same as OMRON connection
Screen data
Shared with OMRON connection
Exclusive use by Memory Link
LCD contrast adjustment
By a control on the rear of the unit
By touch panel operation
Backlight brightness adjustment
Not possible
By touch panel operation
Number of user-registered screens
Maximum of 2000
Maximum of 3999
Screen data capacity*2
512 KB
1 MB
Numeral string data
Maximum of 1000
Maximum of 2000
Character string data
Maximum of 1000
Maximum of 2000
Bit data
256
Maximum of 1000
Mathematical tables
None
256 max.
Calculations can be executed
automatically in the PT.*1
Image data
Maximum of 224
Maximum of 4095*3
Library data
Maximum of 896
Maximum of 12288*3
Method for storing numeric values
(numeral memory data and PT status
control area)
Fixed as BCD (binary coded decimal)
Selectable from BCD (binary coded
decimal) or binary
PT status control area size
4 words
5 words (partial change of contents)*3
PT status notify area size
3 words
2 words (partial change of contents)*3
Window control area size
None
9 CH*2
Registering continuous screen
Possible
Not possible (Use a screen switchover
as a substitute.)
Lamp/Touch switch labels
Fixed display (1 line only)
-
Interlock function
None
Operations can be disabled from the
PLC by allocating interlock bits to the
corresponding touch switch, numeral
input, or character string input.*1
Device monitor function
Not possible
Possible*1
Recipe function
None
Possible
Accessible CS-series PLC data
areas
---
The data areas listed below can be
accessed in addition to the data areas
accessible with the NT30/NT30C.*5
- EM banks (EM_0 to EM_C)
- Timer completion flags (TU)
- Counter completion flags (CU)
- Work areas (WR)
- Task flags (TK)
- HR area
(User program memory)
Multiple lines can be displayed*1
ON/OFF switching is possible*1
Numeral display is possible*1
Character string display is possible*1
*1: These functions are available only in V2 versions of the NT31/NT31C.
*2: This is the capacity of the flash memory that stores screen data.
*3: The values are the same as the NT30/NT30C when the PT is in NT30/620 compatible mode.
*4: The window control area can be used only in the V versions of the NT31/NT31C.
For differences in programming, refer to Appendix B in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
7
Functions of the NT31/NT31C
Section
1-2-5 Principal Functions of NT31/NT31C
The following are the principal functions of the NT31/NT31C.
Functions relating to data display
Character display
Characters of various sizes can be displayed. Characters can be flashed and displayed in reverse
video. High grade fonts are available for the characters with their size enlarged.
Graphic display
Polylines, rectangles, polygons, circles, circular arcs, and sector shapes can be displayed. They can
also be tiled with various patterns, flashed, or displayed in reverse video.
Memory data display
The contents of character string memory tables and numeral memory tables can be displayed. The
contents of memory tables can be changed from the host.
Graph display
Not only bar graphs but also broken line graphs, trend graphs, and analogue meter graphs can be
displayed using numeral memory tables
Lamp display
Lamps can be turned on and flashed under the control of the host. It is also possible to display different
graphics in the ON and OFF states.
Alarm list/history display
Warning messages are automatically displayed in a list in response to the state of a host bit. The time
and the number of times of the messages appeared can also be displayed.
Functions relating to data output
Buzzer
A built-in buzzer can be sounded.
Screen printing
A hard copy of the currently displayed screen can be printed at the printer
connected to the NT31/NT31C.
8
1-2
Section
Functions relating to data input
Input by touch switches
Data can be input by simply touching touch switches displayed on the screen.
The possible functions of touch switches include sending data to the host and changing the screen display.
Inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when interlock bits have been allocated.
Pop-up window function
A window overlaying the currently displayed screen can be alternately opened and closed by pressing a touch switch.
In addition to fixed character and graphic displays, control keys and character keys created as touch switches can also be set inside the
window. A maximum of three windows can be displayed simultaneously. Since the window need only be opened when input is required,
the screen can be used efficiently.
Numeral/character string setting function
Numeric keys and character keys can be assigned to touch switches so that numeric values and character strings can be input at the
operation site.
The input data is written to numeral/character string memory tables and also sent to the host. It is also possible to disable input by control
from the host.
Recipe function
Several words of numeric data can be edited at the PT Unit, and written to or read from the host in one operation.
Input from a bar code reader
Data read with a bar code reader can be input to a character string input field.
Functions relating to communication
Communications with the host
The NT31/NT31C can communicate with the host by four methods: host link, 1:1 NT Link, 1:N NT link (standard or high-speed), and
Memory link. Data can be read from the host, and data input by means of touch switches and numeral/character string settings can be
sent to the host. It is also possible to connect with other model PLCs.
Functions relating to the system
System menu
System settings and maintenance can be performed by selecting from system menus displayed on the screen.
Creation of screen data
Screen data created using the Support Tool at a personal computer can be transferred and stored in the built-in screen data memory.
Resume function
The status and memory table contents of the NT31/NT31C immediately before its operation is stopped can be stored while operation is
stopped, or while the power is off, and then displayed on the screen again when operation is restarted.
Screen saver function
This function serves to extend the service life of the backlight and prevent the formation of an afterimage on the screen.
Clock function
The time can be displayed in accordance with the internal clock data.
Programming Console function
The PT can perform the same operations as a C200H-PR027-E Programming Console when the PT is connected to a CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E, or SRM1 PLC in a 1:1 NT Link connection, or a CS1G/CS1H PLC in a 1:N NT Link
connection.
Device Monitor function
When the PT is connected to a PLC in a 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link, the PT can be used for operations such as changing the PLC’s
operating mode, displaying or changing the PVs of words, or reading the error log.
System program install function
The system program of the NT31/NT31C can be changed by using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool (NTZJ3AT1/ZJCAT-EV2). It can also be installed by using a memory unit (NT-MF261).
Screen display history function/alarm history function
The screen display history function records the time at which specific screens are displayed and the number of times they are displayed.
The alarm history function records the time at which specific bits at the host are turned ON and the number of times they are turned ON.
Trend graph logging function and background function
Changes in the contents of numeral memory tables displayed in trend graphs can be recorded (logging function). Also, the record can be
maintained even when the trend graph is not displayed (background function).
Mathematical function
This function allows calculations to be executed continuously during PT operation when mathematical table has been set in screen data.
Arithmetic operations, bit operations, logic operations, and comparison operations can be performed. Operations with up to 5 terms are
possible.
9
Section
1-2-6 Displays
The NT31/NT31C can display various kinds of elements such as characters, numeric values, graphs, lamps, and touch switches, on a screen. The screen data
displayed by the NT31/NT31C are created by using the Support Tool at a personal computer.
Characters
(fixed display)
Line 1 Status
Stop
Characters
(character string display)
Machine name: NT31C-ST141
Production qty.: 137 units
Bar graph
25%
0%
Stage 1
Fixed Displays
Check 1
50%
Stage 2
Touch switches
Restart
100%
Numeric values
(numeral display)
Check 2
Lamps
Characters and various graphics (circles, circular arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons and rectangles) whose display does not have to be changed, and mark
data, image data, and library data that has already been registered, can be written directly onto the screen.
Circle
Arc
Sector
Polyline
Polygon
Rectangle
* A continuous straight line with
up to 256 points can be drawn.
* A polygon with up to 255
vertices can be drawn.
Marks are graphics comprising 16 by 16 dots that can be used as characters.
They can be used as custom characters within character strings.
Image data are graphics comprising any required area of dots. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on
the screen.
Windows bit map (BMP) data can be used for images.
There is a two-color mode, in which the display color and background color of the
image are specified when it is registered in a screen, and an eight-color mode in
which colors are assigned to the image in advance.
Since image data is composed of dots, it requires a large data size but offers
great powers of expression.
10
Section
Library data are combinations of fixed display graphics registered as a single
graphic. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on the screen.
Since it is generated by combining graphics, library data has a small data size.
Mark Image data
Lamps
Library data
These are graphics whose display status changes in accordance with the states
of bits at the host. Squares, circles, sectors and polygons can be used for lamps
(normal (standard) lamps). In accordance with the status of the host bit, they can
be lit (displayed in reverse video) or flashed (repeated alternation between normal and reverse video display states).
Lamps can also display different image/library data for the ON and OFF states of
the host bit (such lamps are called image/library lamps).
There are four standard lamp labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings are
used, several lines of labels can be displayed.
Normal (Standard) Lamps
ON
ON
Host
Unlit state
Lit state
Image Library Lamps
ON
Unlit state
Touch Switches
Host
Lit state
These switches can be set at any location on the screen. Pressing a touch switch
on the screen where a touch switch has been set can have the following effects:
• Notification to a host bit (input notification function)
• Changing the displayed screen (screen switching function)
• Input of a numeric value or character string (input key function)
• Copying of a numeric value or character string (copy key function)
• Shifting to another numeric value or character string input field (cursor moving
key function)
• Obtaining a hard copy of the screen (screen print function)
• Opening / Closing a window
• Moving a window
11
Section
Touch switches can be made to light or flash in accordance with the status of a
host bit in the same way as lamps.
The following 8 types of display graphic can be used for touch switches: Standard, shadow, 3-dimension, no display frame, rectangle, circle, polygon, sector
When rectangle, circle, polygon, or sector is selected as the shape, the area
within which pressing of the touch switch is sensed (the touch switch area) can
be set independently of the position where the display graphic is set.
When this
position is
pressed...
Touch
switch area
Shown
in
reverse
video
Display
frame
Function executed
There are four touch-switch labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings are
used, several lines of labels can be displayed.
Numeral Displays
Numeric values stored in the numeral memory tables are displayed. The displayed numerals can be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral
memory tables.
Hexadecimal values can also be displayed.
When decimal values are displayed, the number of digits for the integral part and
fractional part of displayed values can be specified in advance.
String Displays
Character strings stored in the character string memory tables are displayed.
The displayed character strings can be changed by changing the data stored in
the character string memory tables.
Numeral Inputs
Numeric values can be input at the PT by using touch switches. The input numeric values can also be stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the
host.
Numeral inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit
has been allocated.
12345678
789
456
123
0. "
Input
Window
String Inputs
Character strings can be input at the PT by using touch switches, bar code readers, etc. The input character strings can also be stored in a character string
memory table and notified to the host.
String inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit
has been allocated.
Character string setting input field
Display
NT31C
Input
NT31C
12
NT31
NT631C
Section
Thumbwheel Switches
Numeric values can be input by incrementing or decrementing each digit with
the corresponding touch switch (+, –). The input numeric values can also be
stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the host.
Thumbwheel switch inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an
interlock bit has been allocated.
Graphs
These are graphics whose display changes in accordance with the numeric values stored in numeral memory tables. There are the following four types.
Bar Graphs
Bar graphs display the present value in a numeral memory table converted to a
percentage within the range –100% to +100% of a preset value.
60%
Analog Meters
Analogue meters display, using a quarter, half, or full circle shape, the present
value in a numeral memory table converted to a percentage within the range
–100% to +100% of the preset value. Users can choose from moving pointer
type and filling area type displays. Users can also add graduation to the graph.
60%
Broken Line Graphs
Broken line graphs display, in an easy-to-read form, a sequence of numeral
memory table values converted to a percentage within the range –100% to
+100% of a preset value.
100%
0%
–100%
Example showing a series of 11
numeral memory table values
(with a check mark set for the
display sign)
Trend Graphs
Trend graphs display chronological changes in the value in a numeral memory
table, converting the value to a percentage within the range –100% to +100% of
a preset value. The trend graph shifts position with the passage of time.
Past data can also be recorded, and the numeral memory table can be read
(sampled) even while the trend graph is not being displayed.
The user can choose to stop sampling, restart sampling, or display past data, by
pressing touch switches.
13
Section
Alarm List/History
The alarm list/history function displays messages in list form, or graphics
(image/library data), in accordance with changes in bit memory table statuses.
For the alarm list, a series of bit memory tables are monitored, and messages
(contents of character string memory tables) set for bit memory tables that come
ON are displayed.
For the alarm history, bit memory tables for which the history property is set are
continually monitored, and the time when they come ON and number of times
they come ON are recorded and displayed together with the message (character string) set for the bit memory table.
The NT31/NT31C allows selection of the display order as the newest record first
or the oldest record first by memory switch setting.
The alarm list function is used to determine which bits are ON at the present
time. The alarm history function is used to determine the times at which alarms
occurred in the past and how many times alarms have occurred.
Alarm List
Message (character string table No. 32)
set for bit memory table No. 14
Character string table No. 32
Image/library
data 113C
No.13
Bit
Character string table No. 32
Image/library data 113C
No.14
Character string table No. 54
Image/library data 1125
No.15
0
1
0
Character string table No. 50
Image/library data 1002
HOST
A000000
L001003
D010015
1(ON)
When the message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (113C) set for bit memory table No. 14 is displayed.
Alarm History
Message (character string table No. 13)
set for bit memory table No. 24
Recorded data
Character string table No. 13
Character string table No. 11
Image/library data 005F
No. 22
Bit memory table No. 24
97/12/04 11:19:20
Character string table No. 12
Image/library data 102A
No. 23
Bit memory table No. 23
97/12/04 11:25:12
Character string table No. 12
Image/library
data 102B
Character string table No. 13
Image/library data 102B
No. 24
When the upper message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (102B) set for bit memory table No. 13 is displayed.
Recipe
14
You can set several words of numeric data at the PT in tabular format, and write it
to the host. You can also read several words of numeric data from the host and
display it on the PT screen.
Section
System Configuration
1-3
1-3
System Configuration
This section shows the configuration of a system that uses an NT31/NT31C. For
details on product models, refer to Appendix J Model List (page 279).
1-3-1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected
The following peripheral devices can be connected to an NT31/NT31C.
Host
Controls the NT31/NT31C as required while controlling machines and monitoring
the production line.
Host Link: C series, CVM1/CV series PLC, SRM1
Bar code reader
Can be connected to CPU units, host link units, and SRM1. However, connection
Bar codes can be read
as character strings.
is not possible to some models of CPU unit and SRM1 (pages 52 and 99).
NT Link: CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CQM1, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE),
Printer
RS-232C cable
(max. 15 m)
or
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. 500 m)
CVM1/CV series PLCs, SRM1
Can be connected to CPU units and SRM1. However, connection is notpossible
to some models (pages 65, 70, 109 and 111).
Memory Link: Can be connected to a personal computer, FA computer, etc.
Other companies’ PLCs can also be connected.
For printing out the
currently displayed
NT31/NT31C screen.
Personal computer
Running Windows 95/98/NT
Support Tool
Used to create screens for the
NT31/NT31C at the personal
computer and transmit them to the
NT31/NT31C, and to make
NT31/NT31C settings.
System installer
Used to change the system
program of the NT31/NT31C.
Memory unit
Can store screen data
and system program to
be read out
automatically at startup.
NT31/NT31C
Displays production line monitoring and instructions
to the operation site, and notifies the switch
ON/OFF status and numeric value inputs to the
host.
When a 1:N NT Link is being used, up to 8 PTs can
be connected to a single PLC.
• Bar code reader (page 35)
• Recommended printers (page 34)
It is also possible to use printers that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H (using the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol), and printers that comply with
one of the following EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or
ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome).
• Memory unit (pages 37 and 45)
NT-MF261 (made by OMRON)
• Support Tool (page 33)
NT-series Support Tool Version 4.0 for Windows (Made by OMRON)
• NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 (CD-ROM version)
• System installer (page 33)
System installer (made by OMRON)
The system installer is supplied as a standard accessory with the Support
Tool (NTZJCAT1-EV4).
15
Communications with the Host
Section
1-4
Reference: The following optional devices are available. All of them can be used either with
NT31 or NT31C.
Replacement backlight
NT31C-CFL01
(NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141-EV2 (same for both models.) The backlight for the NT31-ST122 -EV2/NT31C-ST142 -EV2 cannot be replaced by
the user.)
Reflection-suppressing protective sheet NT30-KBA04
Chemical-resistant cover
NT30-KBA01
Replacement battery
3G2A9-BAT08
1-3-2 Connecting to the Host
The NT31/NT31C has the following two communication ports.
• Serial port A:
D-SUB 9-pin connector
For RS-232C use only (The Support Tool and bar code readers can be connected here.)
• Serial port B:
D-SUB 25-pin connector
For RS-232C or RS-422A/485 (Selectable by memory switch)
(The Support Tool and bar code readers cannot be connected here.)
The host can be connected at either of these two ports.
The connection methods for each communication method at the PT and host
sides are indicated below. Make the settings in accordance with the communication method that can be used with the PLC to be connected and the conditions at
the operation site.
Reference: When using an RS-232C/422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) with the host link or NT
link (1:1) communication method, RS-485 cannot be used. The connection must
be made with RS-232C or RS-422A.
1-4
Communications with the Host
The NT31/NT31C is connected to the host by one of the following communication methods.
The following communications can be used to connect an OMRON PLC:
• Host link
• 1:1 NT Link
• 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
The following communications can be used to connect another companies’ PLC
or FA computer:
• Communications protocol supported by the other company’s PLC
• Memory link
In all of these communication methods that can be used with NT31/NT31C, data
communication with host is by direct connection (Memory link is, however, a
quasi-direct connection).
In the following, the host link and NT link that carry out the direct connection will
be discussed. Memory links will be explained in 1-5 Communications Using
Memory Links.
1-4-1 Direct Connection Function
With the NT31/NT31C, the bits and words referring to data required for display,
and those for storing input data, can be allocated to any part of the PLC memory
area.
16
Section
Communications with the Host
1-4
The NT31/NT31C can directly write to and read from such allocated bits and
words to change the display status of the elements on the PT screen, control the
PT operating status, and notify statuses to the host.
This function, which directly reads and writes the statuses of words and bits without using a PLC program is called the direct connection function.
The words and bits allocated for direct connection are called the allocated words
and allocated bits.
The direct connection function allows the data to be displayed at the
NT31/NT31C to be read from the memory area in the PLC and written to memory
tables in the NT31/NT31C. Also, the data input at the NT31/NT31C can be written to the memory area in the PLC. The NT31/NT31C screen can be changed in
accordance with statuses in the PLC memory area, and the NT31/NT31C’s status data can be written to the PLC’s memory area.
NT31/NT31C
PLC
DM area
I/O relay area
Auxiliary relay area Timers/counters
Features of the Direct
Connection Function
The direct connection function has the following features.
• The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction information and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost any area
of the PLC memory.
• Since the NT31/NT31C can directly refer to PLC bit and word data without using the program at the PLC, it can be connected to the PLC without changing
the PLC program which controls the currently running production line.
• The area to control and notify the NT31/NT31C statuses, including display
screens, display/no display status, and buzzer output, can be freely allocated
to any part of the PLC data area. This means that the PLC status can be read
and controlled just by reading this area at the PLC side, without preparing a
special communication program.
The direct connection function allows the NT31/NT31C to directly read and write
almost all bits and words in the PLC and to automatically change the
NT31/NT31C screen display. This function can reduce the load on the PLC so
that its program development efficiency is improved.
1-4-2 Host Link
The host is connected to a PT in a 1:1 connection, and the words and bits of the
host are read and displayed by host link communication. This method can be
used for connection to the majority of PLC types.
1-4-3 NT Link
NT link is a method for high-speed communication with a PLC using the direct
connection function. The PLCs that can be connected with the NT link are as
follows.
• When using the built-in host link function of a CPU unit or SRM1:
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CVM1/CV-series PLC (-EV1 or later version), SRM1
Besides the 1:1 NT Link method, in which one PLC is connected to one PT, the
NT31/NT31C can also use the 1:N connection NT Link method, which allows a
maximum of eight PTs to be connected to one PLC port.
17
Communications with the Host
Section
1-4
PLCs that can be connected with the 1:N connection NT Link method are as follows: CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE (-Z)E, CS1G/CS1H-E(V1).
The NT31/NT31C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link that provides faster 1:N communications. The only PLCs that support the high-speed
1:N NT Link are the -EV1 and higher versions of the CS1G/CS1H PLCs.
In the following sections, the term NT Link is used to refer to the NT Link communication method in general, the term 1:1 NT Link is used to refer specifically to
NT Links with a 1:1 connection, and the term 1:N NT Link is used to refer to both
standard and high speed NT Links with 1:N connections. When necessary, the
standard 1:N NT Link is distinguished from the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
Features of the NT Link
The NT link has the following features.
• High-speed communications with specific types of PLCs can be executed. The
NT31/NT31C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link.
• Writing in units of bits to the PLC memory area is possible.
This enables the other bits of words to which a touch switch has been allocated to be allocated for other purposes (e.g. a lamp).
However, since data is written to the DM area in word units, the other bits of
words allocated to touch switches in this area cannot be used for other purposes.
• The NT link can be used even when the PLC is in the RUN mode. (When the
host link method is used, the NT31/NT31C switches to the monitor mode when
the PLC is in the RUN mode.)
• In the case of PTs that support the standard 1:N NT Link (NT20S, NT31,
NT31C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631C) up to 8 PTs
can be connected to one port of the PLC and used at the same time. Up to 8
PTs (NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C) can also be connected simultaneously when the high-speed 1:N NT Link is being used.
All of the PTs connected to a PLC port must use either the standard or highspeed 1:N NT Link; the two communications systems cannot share a single
port.
• When using a C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLC and standard 1:N NT Links, up to
three 1:N NT Link systems (i.e., 24 PTs) can be connected by installing a communication board in the option slot of the CPU. (Only the standard 1:N NT Link
can be used.) For details on the Communications Board, refer to the SYSMAC
Communications Board Operation Manual (W304-E1-).
• When using a CQM1H PLC and standard 1:N NT Links, multiple 1:N NT Link
systems can be connected by installing Serial Communications Boards in the
Inner Board slots. For details on the Serial Communications Board, refer to the
CQM1H Serial Communications Board Operation Manual (W365-E1-).
• When using CS1G or CS1H PLC, multiple 1:N NT Link systems (standard or
high-speed) can be connected by installing a Serial Communications Board in
the INNER Board slot or installing a Serial Communications Unit in the Backplane. For details on the communication board/communication unit, refer to
the CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Board/Unit Operation Manual
(W336-E1-).
• If the PLC used supports the Programming Console function, the
NT31/NT31C can be used as a Programming Console.
• If the PLC being used supports the Device Monitor function, the NT31/NT31C
can be used to change the PLC’s operating mode and read/change data in the
PLC’s memory areas.
The NT link is compatible with the host link. The NT31/NT31C screen data and
PLC programs used with the host link direct connection method can be used with
the NT link method as they are.
18
Section
Communications Using Memory Links
1-5
1-4-4 Connecting to other Companies’ PLCs
Installing a system program for multi-venders by using a specific system installer
enables the NT31/NT31C to be connected to the PLCs of other models in direct
connection. This system installer is supplied with the Support Tool (NTZJCAT1-EV4).
Compatible PLC
1-5
The NT31/NT31C can be connected to the following model PLCs.
• Mitsubishi A series programmable controller (computer link module)
• Mitsubishi FX series programmable controller
• SLC 500 Series by Allen-Bradley
• 90-20 and 90-30 Series by GE Fanuc
• S7-300 and S7-400 Series by Siemens
For details on the procedure for connecting to other model PLCs, refer to the
PLC Connection Manual or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual.
Communications Using Memory Links
In this section, a communication method other than the direct connection, called
the memory link, is discussed.
1-5-1 Memory Link
Memory link is a method to send and receive data between a personal computer
or a FA computer and the NT31/NT31C by using RS-232C/422A communication.
In memory link, there is an area called PT Memory, as shown below, inside the
NT31/NT31C, and this area is treated as a virtual area on the PLC. This allows
PT memory and the display elements of the NT31/NT31C to make a quasi-direct
connection. By sending a command for the memory link, the host can make the
NT31/NT31C execute processes through PT memory. Frequently used commands are kept handy for read and write tasks of the numeral memory table,
character-string memory table, and bit memory table.
NT31/NT31C
PT
PLC
PT memory
Numeral
memory
table
Lamp
Direct connection
RS-232C/422A
communication
In the memory link method, the only difference is that the NT31/NT31C finds its
communication target inside instead of outside. In the memory link method,
therefore, change of the target is all that is needed to be capable of using the
exact screen data that is acquired by the direct connection. (With the
NT31/NT31C, the Support Tool must be used to convert the data to screen data
for the memory link.)
When compared to the direct connection of the host link or NT link methods, the
memory link method has some restrictions regarding the use of some functions,
as described below.
• The Programming Console and Device Monitor functions cannot be used.
• The following strobes of PT status notify bits does not turn on (page 7 to 27).
19
Communications Using Memory Links
Section
1-5
Screen switching strobe
Numerals input strobe
Character-string input strobe
• The usable area for allocation is the PT memory only.
1-5-2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link
The major differences between the direct connection and the memory link are as
follows:
• In the memory link method, the communication with the host should be carried
out by using commands. Compared to the ordinal direct connection, which can
be used requiring almost no programs, the memory link method requires a program that is necessary for interchange of commands. This, however, gives advantages to the memory link method by using a large variety of functions available in the direct connections from major models such as a personal computer
and a FA computer equipped with RS-232C/RS-422A communication means,
allowing the PT to be suited for larger usage.
• Actual PLCs have many kinds of areas, where as PT memory is a single area
with only one kind. When creating screen data by using the memory link methods, it is always necessary to allocate display parts in the PT memory.
For communication between the host and the PT by the memory link method and
for handling screen display elements, refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
1-5-3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function
When memory link communications are being used, the NT31/NT31C can be
switched to Transmit mode from the host even if the NT31/NT31C is operating
and screen data can be written. (The NT31/NT31C can be returned to RUN
mode after the screen data is written.)
The memory link online transfer function can be used to replace screen data at a
fixed time each day or replace screen data with maintenance screen data for
maintenance.
For more details on the memory link online transfer function, refer to information
on the memory link online transfer function in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
20
Section
Before Operating
1-6
1-6
Before Operating
Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT31/NT31C.
Host
Support Tool
NT31/NT31C
Set the host settings.
Install the PT in the
operation panel.
• For the host link, refer to
pages 52 and 99, and the
manuals for the host link
unit and peripheral tools.
• For the NT link (1:1), refer
to pages 65 and 109.
• For the NT link (1:N), refer to pages 70 and 111.
• For the high-speed NT
link (1:N), refer to pages
74 and 113.
• For the Memory link, refer
to pages 70 and 114
Install the Support
Tool at the computer.
(refer to the manual for
the Support Tool)
(page 30)
Connect the power supply.
(page 31)
Install the system program.*1
(refer to page 149 and the
Support Tool manual)
Make the settings in the
system installer mode.*2
(page 149)
Transmit the screen data.
Create the screens.
(Refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual
and the Support Tool Operation Manual.)
(page 153)
Set the memory switches.
(page 155)
Connect to the host.
Connect to the
NT31/NT31C.
When RS-232C used at the PT: refer to section 4
When RS-422A/485 used at the PT: refer to section 5
Create the host program.
Confirm the settings and
check communication.
Start operation.
*1: System program installation is only done in special circumstances, for example
when changing the system program, or to recover the original status of the
installed program. This operation is not normally necessary. When using other PLC
models (sequencers), however, it is necessary to install specific system programs.
*2: Display of the system menu, and all change operations, can be inhibited. This
enables you to prevent the accidental deletion or alteration of screens and
settings.
Reference:
For the system program, use the NT31/NT31C system program supplied as
an accessory with the NT-series Support Tool (NT-ZJCAT1-EV4).
For the Support Tool, use NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1).
Refer to the following manuals for the devices and software.
Device or Software
Manual Title
Manual
Number
NT31/NT31C,
NT631/NT631C
Reference Manual
V064-E1-1
System Installer
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual
V061-E1-
Support Tool
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual
V061-E1-
21
Section
Before Operating
Device or Software
PLC
Manual Title
1-6
Manual
Number
SYSMAC CPM1 Operation Manual
W262-E1-
SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual
W317-E1-
SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual
W352-E1-
SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual
W356-E1-
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU01/03/11) (programming)
W130-E1-
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU21/23/31) (programming)
W217-E1-
SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide
W236-E1-
SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual (programming)
W235-E1-
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE-Z Installation Guide
W302-E1-
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programming Manual
W303-E1-
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE-Z Programming Manual
W322-E1-
SYSMAC C1000H/C2000H Operation Manual (programming)
W140-E1-
SYSMAC CQM1 Programming Manual
W228-E1-
SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual
W363-E1-
SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/CV2000 Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams
W202-E1-
CS-series CS1G/H-CPU -E Programmable Controllers Operation
Manual
W339-E1-
CS/CJ-series Serial Communication Boards/Units Operation Manual
W336-E1-
SYSMAC CQM1H Series Serial Communications Board Operation Manual
W365-E1-
CompoBus Master Control
Unit
SRM1 Operation Manual
W318-E1-
Programming
g
g Devices
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C-series PLCs
W248-E1-
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PLCs
W249-E1-
SYSMAC CPT User Manual and Quick Start Guide
W332-E1-
W333-E1-
CX-Programmer Operation Manual (Ver. 3.1)
W414-E1-
CX-Programmer Operation Manual (Ver. 4.0)
W425-E1-
SYSMAC C-series Host Link Unit Operation Manual
W143-E1-
SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series Host Link Operation Manual
W205-E1-
Host Link Unit/
S i l Communications
Serial
C
i i
Board
SYSMAC C200HW-COM01 C200HW-COM02-V1 to C200HW-COM06-EV1 W304-E1-
Serial Communications Board Operation Manual
22
SECTION 2
Preparing for Connection
This section describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs, and the functions of the parts of PTs, as the
required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.
2-1
2-2
Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
27
23
Section
Method for Connection to the Host
2-1
2-1
Method for Connection to the Host
This section describes the methods for connection to the host used with the
NT31/NT31C, and the relationship between the connection method and the
communication method.
NT31/NT31C Communication Ports and Communication Methods
The NT31/NT31C has two communication ports. Their uses are indicated in the
table below.
Communication
Port
Usable Communication Methods
Serial port A
Host link
NT link (1:1)
NT link (1:N)*
Memory link
(Support Tool connection)
(bar code reader input function)
RS-232C
Serial port B
Host link
NT link (1:1)
NT link (1:N)*
Memory link
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
(select between RS-232C
and RS-422A/485)
Communication Type
* There are two NT Link (1:N) communications rates: standard and high-speed.
Communication Methods That Can Be Used with the Host
The following communication methods can be used with the hosts that can be
connected to the NT31/NT31C.
• RS-232C
• RS-422A
• RS-485
The communication types that are actually supported differ depending on the
host unit. For details, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port and Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Converting the Communication Type with an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor
Unit
The following communication type conversions are possible by using an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001-E, made by OMRON).
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-422A
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-485
24
Section
Method for Connection to the Host
2-1
Combinations of Communication Method and Connection Method
The connection methods that can be used depending on the communication
method used and the communication type for communication between the
NT31/NT31C and the host are indicated in the table below.
Communica
Communication Type at
PT
Usable Communication
Method
Communica
Communication Type at
Host
Usable Connection Method
Details
Host
link
NT
Link
(1:1)
NT
Link
(1:N)
Memory
link
77
86
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
RS-232C
Host
RS-232C
RS-232C (max. 15 m)
1:1 connection via a convertor unit
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
Host
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
RS-422A
(max. 500 m)
1:N connection via a convertor unit
RS-232C
PT
Host
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-422A
(total length 500 m)
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
90
RS-422A
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Host
115
RS-422A (max. 500 m)
1:N connection
RS-422A
PT
Host
RS-422A (total length 500 m)
: Connection possible
120
: Connection not possible
25
Section
Method for Connection to the Host
Communica
Communication Type at
PT
2-1
Usable Communication
Method
Communica
Communication Type at
Host
Usable Connection Method
Host
link
NT
Link
(1:1)
NT
Link
(1:N)
Memory
link
Details
1:1 connection via a convertor unit
PT
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-485
(max. 500 m)
Host
86
90
119
123
RS-232C
(max. 2 m)
1:N connection via a convertor unit
RS-232C
PT
Host
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-485
RS232C
(total length 500 m) (max. 2 m)
RS
485
RS-485
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Host
RS-485 (max. 500 m)
1:N connection
RS-485
PT
Host
RS-485 (total length 500 m)
: Connection possible
: Connection not possible
• The RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) requires +5 V, 150 mA at
pin 6 of the RS-232C connector. Check the signals of the RS-232C connector
at the host.
• +5 V is not output from serial port B of the NT31/NT31C. When connecting an
NT-AL001 at serial port B, a separate power supply is required for the NTAL001.
• The cable of an NT-AL001 cannot be connected or disconnected while the
power is ON. Always connect or disconnect the cable while the power supply
from the RS-232C cable is OFF (while the host power supply is OFF).
• NT link (1:N) connection is possible even when RS-232C is used at the
NT31/NT31C side for communication with the host, but in this case one NTAL001 unit is required for each NT31/NT31C. In this case, it is convenient to
use serial port A of the NT31/NT31C. +5 V is not output from serial port B.
26
Section
Names and Functions of Parts
2-2
2-2
Names and Functions of Parts
Before starting operation, the names and functions of the parts of the
NT31/NT31C are described here as a confirmation. A method of hardware settings is also described.
Front View
POWER LED
Lit in green when the power is supplied.
POWER
RUN
Display
RUN LED
• Lit in green while the unit The NT31 has a monochrome LCD
screen with a backlight, and the NT31C
is in the RUN mode.
• Lit in orange or red when has an STN color LCD screen with a
the battery is low (orange backlight.
in the RUN mode, red in The whole area of the screen is a touch
panel which works as an input device.
other modes).
Reference: The NT31/NT31C comes in two body colors.
NT31
NT31C
Body Color
NT31-ST121-EV2
NT31-ST122-EV2
NT31C-ST141-EV2
NT31C-ST142-EV2
Beige
NT31-ST121B-EV2
NT31-ST122B-EV2
NT31C-ST141B-EV2
NT31C-ST142B-EV2
Black
27
Section
Names and Functions of Parts
2-2
Rear View
Battery cover
The battery is secured underneath this cover.
Reset switch (inside the cover)
Used to initializes all the statuses of the NT31/NT31C.
However, registered data such as screen data, and memory
switch settings, retain their statuses before initialization.
GR terminal
Grounding terminal to prevent
malfunction due to noise.
Expansion interface connector
(under the label)
When using an expansion
interface unit such as a memory
unit, peel off the label and
connect it here.
24V
DC
PRINTER
Power input terminals
Connect the power to the
NT31/NT31C at these
terminals.
PORT B
PORT A
Warning label
Backlight unit (inside the cover)
Open the cover to reveal the backlight.
The backlight is off while the cover is
removed. Tighten the cover screw
securely.
Serial port A connector
Connect the cable for connection to the
host or Support Tool here. A bar code
reader can also be connected here. This is
a 9-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
Serial port B connector
Connect the cable for connection to the host here. Depending on the
setting made at the NT31/NT31C system menu, either RS-232C or
RS-422A/485 may be used. This is a 25-pin connector.
It is not possible to use RS-232C and RS-422A/485 at the same time.
Printer connector
Connect the printer cable here. Output
conforms to Centronics specifications.
Note Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
28
SECTION 3
Hardware Settings and Connections
This section describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices.
For details on connecting to the host, refer Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to
the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Installation in the Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Setting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (-V Versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -V Suffix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
30
31
32
33
34
34
35
35
35
36
37
38
38
45
46
46
29
Section
Installation
3-1
Note On unpacking the NT31/NT31C and peripheral devices, check their external appearance and confirm that there is no damage. Also confirm that there is no abnormal noise on shaking the unit lightly.
3-1
Installation
Install the NT31/NT31C in the operation panel and connect the power to the
NT31/NT31C as described below.
3-1-1 Installation Environment
Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel.
Note
1. Do not install the unit at sites subject to the following conditions.
• Severe temperature variations
• Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications
• High humidity, condensation
• Splashing chemical agents
• Severe oil splashing
• Corrosive or flammable gases
• Strong vibrations or shocks
• Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)
• Strong ultra-violet irradiation
2. Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the unit is used at a location
subject to any of the following conditions.
• Static electricity, or noise from other equipment
• Strong electromagnetic fields
• Nearby power cables
• Potential exposure to radioactivity
3-1-2 Installation in the Operation Panel
The NT31/NT31C is mounted in an operation panel by embedding it in the panel.
Use the panel fittings and tool (Philips screwdriver) included in the product package and follow the procedure below.
1, 2, 3...
1. Open a hole of the dimensions shown below in the panel and install the
NT31/NT31C from the front side of the panel.
131
184
+ 0.5 mm
0 mm
+ 0.5 mm
0 mm
2. Attach the panel fittings at the four positions at top and bottom and two positions at right and left, shown below, from the rear of the NT31/NT31C.
Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw
with the Philips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting.
24V
DC
PRINTER
30
PORT B
PORT A
Section
Installation
Note
3-1
1. During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the
unit.
2. The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1.6 mm to 4.8 mm. All fittings
must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0.5 to 0.6 N⋅m in order to ensure
water- and dust-resistance. Front sheet of NT31/NT31C may be warped if
the tightening is too strong or not uniformity. The panel must not be soiled or
warped, and must be able to support an installation that will remain secure
and strong.
3-1-3 Power Supply Connection
Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals.
Note
1. Depending on how the power is switched ON/OFF, the entire system may
stop. Follow the correct procedure when switching the power ON/OFF.
2. Carefully check the wiring before switching ON the power.
3. Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals.
4. Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation.
5. Do not perform a dielectric strength test.
6. If complying with EC directives (low voltage directives), use a power supply
with reinforced insulation (compliance with EC directives is planned for June
1998).
24 VDC
Breaker
24 VDC
power supply
Power Supply
The applicable power supply specifications are as follows.
Item
Value
Power supply
24 VDC
Allowable power supply
voltage fluctuation range
Power supply voltage
capacity
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15%, +10%)
15 W or more
Parts Used for Connection
Note For the connection to the power supply terminal block, twisted wires of 2 mm2 or
greater cross sectional area and M3.5 size crimp terminals must be used.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
Fork type
7 mm or less
Round type
7 mm or less
Recommended Terminals
Type
(fork type)
Type
(round type)
Japan Solderless Terminal MFG
2-YS3A
2-3.5
Fuji Terminal
2-YAS3.5
V2-S3.5
Nichifu Terminal
2Y-3.5
2-3.5
Maker
Applicable Wire
(stranded wire)
2.0 to 2.63 mm2
31
Section
Installation
3-1
Note When surge noise occurs in the DC power supply, connect a Transistor Voltage
Suppressor (TVS) between the 24-V and 0-V DC terminals.
Recommended TVS model: 1.5KE33CA
Manufacturers: Vishay Intertechnology Inc, ST Microelectronics
3-1-4 Grounding
The NT31/NT31C has a functional ground terminal (
Carry out wiring under the following conditions.
1, 2, 3...
).
1. In cases where there is a potential difference between the grounds of the
NT31/NT31C and the host, ground as shown in the following figure. If there
is some distance between the NT31/NT31C and host and grounding at a
single point is difficult, do not connect the functional ground terminal ( ) of
the NT31/NT31C.
2. If the NT31/NT31C is installed in the same panel as equipment that generates noise, such as a motor or inverter, do not ground the functional ground
terminal ( ) of the NT31/NT31C.
NT31/
NT31C
Host
Grounding at
a single point
Note Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent operating errors due to noise.
32
Section
Connecting to the Support Tool
3-2
3-2
Connecting to the Support Tool
In order to install the system program in the NT31/NT31C, or to transmit screen
data created with the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C, the NT31/NT31C must
be connected to a personal computer with an RS-232C cable.
The NT31/NT31C connects the RS-232C cable from a personal computer at serial port A. When the host is connected at serial port B, the connection with the
host can be maintained as it is while the NT31/NT31C is connected to the
RS-232C cable from a personal computer.
However, when a bar code reader is being used, it must be disconnected, so that
the RS-232C cable can be connected, since they both use serial port A.
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Communication Conditions
The communication conditions are automatically set when the system installer
and Support Tool are started.
Recommended Connector Cable
Use the cable indicated below.
• CV500-CN228 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 25-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S001 (conversion cable), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 25-pin, female ⇔ half pitch 14-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S002 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 9-pin, female)
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix F Making the Cable
for Connecting a PLC (page 269).
33
Section
Connecting a Printer
3-3
3-3
Connecting a Printer
Connecting a printer to the NT31/NT31C enables printing of hard copies of the
currently displayed screen (printing of screen images), and, by system menu operations, printing of the screen display history and alarm history.
The following types of data can be printed, depending on the printer connected
to the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to the pages cited.
• Hard copies of the screen (Refer to information on printing data and checking
the printer status in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.)
• Screen display history record data (page 196)
• Alarm history record data (page 198)
3-3-1 Connection Method
Connect the printer to the NT31/NT31C with a Centronics cable, as shown below. The length of the cable should not exceed 1.5 m.
Reference: If the connector cable is connected or disconnected while the power to the printer
is on, the NT31/NT31C may malfunction. Always turn off the power to the printer
before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
24V
DCPRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
Recommended Connector Cable
The following connection cables are recommended.
• NT-CNT121 (1.5 m, 20-pin to 36-pin), made by OMRON
Recommended Printers
When using a printer, use one that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H (using
the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol) or complies with one of the following EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or ESC/P 24-J82
(monochrome).
When using a monochrome printer with an NT31C, set Tone printing with the
NT31C memory switches (page 172).
34
Section
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
3-4
3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Connecting a bar code reader to the NT31/NT31C enables bar code data to read
as character strings into character string input fields, and set in character string
memory tables.
In order to use a bar code reader, the Comm. A Method memory switch must be
set to Bar-Code Reader.
For details on the method for inputting character strings with a bar code reader,
refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings in the NT31/NT31C/
NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.
Note Make sure that the power supply to the bar code reader and the power supply to
the PT are both OFF before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
3-4-1 Connection Method
Connect the bar code reader to serial port A of the NT31/NT31C, as shown in the
figure below.
NT31/NT31C
PRINTER
PORT B
Bar code reader
PORT A
Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
9-pin connector
Connector cable
Bar code reader cable
Bar code reader must match the communication setting (3-4-2 Setting a Bar
Code Reader, page 35) and data format (3-4-3 Data Format, page 36) in order to
connect to the NT31/NT31C. Please confirm the specification of the bar code
reader before using.
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix G Making the Cable
for Connection to a Bar Code Reader (page 271).
Reference: The bar code reader must be connected to serial port A. This means that it cannot
be connected at the same time as the Support Tool. Note also that when a bar
code reader is used, the host must be connected at serial port B.
3-4-2 Setting a Bar Code Reader
After connecting a bar code reader, set the communication conditions and other
settings for it by selection from the system menu.
Settings at the
NT31/NT31C
At the NT31/NT31C, set the communication conditions for communication with
the bar code reader by using the memory switches, selecting from the options
indicated in the table below.
For more detailed information on the actual system menu operations, refer to
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function (page 186).
Item
Possible Settings
Default Setting
Data bits
7 or 8 bits
7 bits
Stop bit(s)
1 or 2 bits
2 bits
Parity
None, odd, even
Even
Communications speed 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
9600 bps
Input Method
Manual
Manual, Auto
35
Section
Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Settings at the Bar Code
Reader
3-4
Make the settings shown in the table below at the bar code reader. Make sure
that the communications speed, parity, stop bit, and data bit settings match the
communication settings made at the NT31/NT31C. For details on the setting
method, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.
Item
Possible Settings
Communications speed
4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Parity
EVEN, ODD, NONE
Stop bits
1 or 2 bits
Data bits
7 or 8 bits
Preamble
STX
Postamble
ETX
RS/CS control
Available
Communication protocol
No-protocol mode
Transmission of number of bar code label digits
Transmission prohibited
Transmission of ID characters
Transmission prohibited
Bar code types
Multi-reading (all types can be
read)
Trigger switch setting
Automatic reading mode
About RS/CS Control
During bar code reading, the NT31/NT31C performs RS/CS control. When the
Input Method setting of the NT31/NT31C is set to Auto, the RS signal is turned
OFF, prohibiting the next input, until the read data has been notified to the host.
Because of this, when the Auto setting is made, the next input is not possible
until the data has been notified to the host.
However, when the setting is Auto and the RS/CS signals of the cable are
shorted, RS/CS control is ineffective. Consequently, data input from the bar
code reader to the NT31/NT31C is updated regardless of whether or not the data
is notified to the host.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.
3-4-3 Data Format
The data format for communication when using the bar code input function of the
NT31/NT31C is shown below.
STX
(02H)
Data
Data
Data
ETX
(03H)
The characters which are effective as data are hexadecimal codes from 20 to
7FH, and the maximum data length is 40 bytes.
Data which does not follow the data format described above is invalidated and
discarded.
36
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
3-5
3-5
Using a Memory Unit (-V Versions)
This section discusses the use of a memory unit with a V1 or V2 version of an
NT31/NT31C PT (NT31-ST121/122-EV or NT31C-ST141/142-EV).
Reference: Depending on the PT model and the system program which is installed, the function and using method of memory unit varies as follows.
PT Model
Without V
suffix
With V suf
suffix
System Program
Earlier than Ver. 2
Ver. 2 or later
Earlier than Ver. 2
Ver. 2 or later
Function of Memory Unit
Conventional memory unit function. (Refer to
56.)
(System programs can not be transmitted using memory unit.)
New memory unit function.
(System programs can be transmitted using
memory unit.)
The memory unit functions are determined by the model of PT being used, regardless of the version of the system program installed in the PT.
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT31/NT31C, the screen data in
the NT31/NT31C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the
NT31/NT31C when it starts up. This means that system program and screen
data can be changed easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support Tool.
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with
the control performed in each case, the NT31/NT31C screen data can be
changed simply by installing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support
Tool.
In addition, even if NT31/NT31C is replaced, the previous status can be maintained simply by installing the memory unit that retains the system program and
screen data of the previous NT31/NT31C.
By using the following combinations, data can be stored (backed up) to a
memory unit.
• Screen data for two PTs.
• System program for two PTs.
• System program and screen data for one PT.
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
Note
1. Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or disconnecting a memory unit.
After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten its two screws.
2. During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the
NT31/NT31C or reset it.
3. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.
37
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Reference:
3-5
When a memory unit is mounted, the NT31/NT31C cannot be set to the operating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always
disconnect the memory unit from the NT31/NT31C before starting
NT31/NT31C operation.
Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT models: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C (with or without the V suffix). One
memory unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. However, since the data compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and
NT631/NT631C, an error may occur if an attempt is made to read NT631C data
with an NT31C. (The data must be converted using the Support Tool.)
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be correct since these models have different numbers of colors.
One memory unit can store a system program for up to two PTs of different
models. In order to transmit a system program from the memory unit to the
NT31/NT31C, the system program must be compatible to the target PT model.
The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded
to the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is
written into the NT31/NT31C, make sure that these settings can be adapted to
the NT31/NT31C used before transmission.
3-5-1 Installation Method
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the
rear of the NT31/NT31C as shown in the figure below (the expansion interface
connector is located underneath the note label.).
Mounting screws
3-5-2 Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches,
and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.
OFF
OFF
SW1
Note
38
SW2
1. Always confirm that the power to the NT31/NT31C is off before setting the
DIP switches.
2. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
DIP Switch Functions
3-5
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table
below.
• SW1
Switch
Function
SW1 1
SW1-1
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory
unit to the PT)
OFF: Not executed
SW1 2
SW1-2
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to
the memory unit)
OFF: Not executed
SW1 3
SW1-3
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission
and bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-4
Data type to transfer
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
OFF: Screen data
ON : System
program
• SW2
Switch
Function
SW2 1
SW2-1
Disable/enable writing to PT
SW2 2
SW2-2
Disable/enable writing to the memory unit
SW2 3
SW2-3
Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission.
transmission *
SW2 4
SW2-4
System/Screen simultaneous transmission
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Bank 0
ON : Bank 1
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
* The memory unit stores system program or screen data for one PT in each of
areas (bank 0, bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which
of these two banks is used for automatic transmission.
Reference:
The DIP switch function of the memory unit is supplemented to NT31/NT31C
with the V suffix.
In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
• More than one of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
• None of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
Transmitting to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for
SW2-1 or SW2-2.
In the following cases, a data transmission error occurs.
• An attempt is made to transmit data other than the system program to PT
system program area.
• An attempt is made to transmit the system program to PT screen data
area.
For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to Errors
When Using a Memory Unit (page 43).
39
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Writing Screen Data to a
Memory Unit Using
Automatic Transmission
(PT to Memory Unit)
3-5
In this mode, system program or the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is forcibly
written to the memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation
is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the operation site is using the system.
Reference: When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in
the specified area up until that point is lost (if the data is written into only one
Bank, the other Bank will not be affected).
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT31/NT31C to the
memory unit by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the power supply to the NT31/NT31C is OFF, then set the DIP
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to
NT31/NT31C.
SW1
SW2
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the PT),
but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of operating
errors.
Reference:
Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW1-4.
Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW2-3, writes the system program into bank 0, and the screen
data into bank 1 at all times.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen
data in the NT31/NT31C is preserved.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of the data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing
Transmitting
Verifying
Finished
: flashes at intervals of 1 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
: lights up
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit.
To operate NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back
ON.
40
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Writing Screen Data to
the PT Using Automatic
Transmission (Memory
Unit to PT)
3-5
In this mode, the system program or screen data in the memory unit is forcibly
written to NT31/NT31C irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool or
system installer is used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same
system program or screen data to multiple NT31/NT31C, this mode becomes
convenient.
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C, the data that has been stored up until
that point is lost. When the system program is changed, the operation of
NT31/NT31C also changes.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the
NT31/NT31C by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the
memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to NT31/NT31C.
SW1
SW2
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
Reference:
Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW1-4.
Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables
the setting of SW2-3. In this case, the data transmission becomes possible
only if the data inside memory unit is in either of following combinations.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
If the combination is not as listed above, a data transmitting error occurs.
When writing the system program into the NT31/NT31C, the type of system
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
The RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing
: flashes at intervals of 1 second
Transmitting
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
Verifying
: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
Finished
: lights up
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit.
To operate NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back
ON.
41
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
Reading and Writing Data
by Manual Transmission
3-5
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used
are set by touch switch operations at the NT31/NT31C. Transmission can be
executed while checking the settings.
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C or memory unit, the data that has been
stored up until that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write screen data using manual transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the
memory unit as follows.
SW1
SW2
Setting of SW2-4 not relevant
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
Setting of SW1-4 not relevant
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable to
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data
is to be read.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
Display language select screen appears.
3. Press the Japanese or English touch switches to select the display language.
The following descriptions are for when English is selected.
The screen shown below is displayed.
Current PT Screen Data, System
The first line:
Compatible PT type for the system program inside PT.
The second line: System program name and Version for the system program inside PT.
42
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
3-5
(The second line may not be displayed in the kind of system program.)
Current PT Screen Data, Screen
The comment for the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is displayed here.
Current Memory Unit Screen Data
• In the case of system program:
The first line:
Compatible PT type for the system program inside the
memory unit.
The second line: System program name and Version for the system program inside the memory unit.
(The second line may not be displayed in the system program for some
models.)
• In the case of screen data:
The comment for the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is displayed here.
The available transmitting destinations are altered depending on the settings of
the origin of transmitting as described in the table below.
Source
[PT]screen
Destination
[[Memory
y unit]] Bank 0
[[Memory
y unit]] Bank 1
[PT]system
[PT]system/screen
[Memory unit] Bank 0/1 (fixed)
[Memory unit] Bank 0
If system program is selected
[PT]system
y
((fixed))
If screen data is selected
[PT]screen (fixed)
[Memory unit] Bank 1
[Memory unit] Bank 0/1
Reference:
[PT]system/screen (fixed)
When transmitting the system program and screen data simultaneously from
the PT to the memory unit, the setting of banks is Bank 0: system program,
Bank 1: screen data, and when transmitting them from the memory unit to the
PT, either of the following combinations must be used.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
When writing the system program into the NT31/NT31C, the type of system
program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding.
4. Press Execute.
The data is transmitted.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed in accordance with the progress of data transmission. At the same
time, the progress of data transmitting status is displayed by the means of
the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
When the data transmission is operated manually, RUN LED remains OFF.
5. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then switch
the NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Errors When Using a
Memory Unit
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT31/NT31C operates as
follows.
• The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
Each screen has touch switches to change the display language from one to
the other. When the manual data transmission is operating, the content of
error and remedial action are shown with selected language. When the automatic transmission is operating, it is displayed in Japanese.
43
Section
Using a Memory Unit (-Vj Versions)
3-5
• The continuous buzzer sounds.
• The RUN LED flashes.
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is possible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the
OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above remains in effect until the NT31/NT31C power is turned OFF or reset.
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
44
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Mode setting error
DIP switches SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or
more than one is ON.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(automatic
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(manual
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Perform either of the following
procedures.
Press the OK touch switch to return to the memory unit manual
transmission screen, make the
correct settings, then try again.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, correct the DIP switches
settings of the memory unit, then
turn the power back ON.
Flash memory error
An error occurred during
initialization of the
NT31/NT31C or memory
unit flash memory, or
during write processing.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
Verify error
An error occurred during
verification processing at
the flash memory of the
NT31/NT31C or the
memory unit.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
Transmitting data
error
(The automatic
transmission only)
An attempt is made to
transmit data other than
a system program or the
system program of a
different PLC model into
the NT31/NT31C as the
system program.
An attempt is made to
write a system program
into the NT31/NT31C as
screen data.
Perform either of the following
procedures.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, correct the DIP switch settings of the memory unit, and
then turn the power back ON.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the DIP switch settings
to the manual transmission, and
then check the data inside the
memory unit.
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
3-6
Section
3-6
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -V Suffix)
This section discusses the use of a memory unit with the basic versions of the
NT31/NT31C PTs (NT31-ST121-E or NT31C-ST141-E).
Reference: In this case, the function and use of the memory unit are the same as ones for the
NT31/NT31C without the V suffix. (The system program transmission by using
a memory unit cannot be processed.)
By installing a memory unit (NT-MF261) on the NT31/NT31C, the screen data in
the NT31/NT31C can be recorded (backed up) in the memory unit.
In addition, the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the
NT31/NT31C when it starts up. This means that screen data can be changed
easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support Tool.
The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with
the control performed in each case, the NT31/NT31C screen data can be
changed simply by changing the memory unit, without connecting to the Support
Tool.
One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
Note
1. Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or disconnecting a memory unit. After mounting a memory unit, be sure to tighten
its two screws.
2. During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the
NT31/NT31C or reset it.
3. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.
Reference:
When a memory unit is mounted, the NT31/NT31C cannot be set to the operating status. On completion of data transmission with a memory unit, always
disconnect the memory unit from the NT31/NT31C before starting
NT31/NT31C operation.
Memory units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT models: NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C (with or without the V suffix). One
memory unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models. However, since the data compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and
NT631/NT631C, the data of NT631 cannot be used in NT31C without putting it
through a conversion (the data must be converted using the Support Tool).
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and
NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not be correct since these models have different numbers of colors.
The screen data for NT31/NT31C PTs with system program Ver. 2 or later
cannot be used with PTs with system program earlier than Ver. 2.
The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded
to the memory unit besides screen data. When the data in the memory unit is
written into the NT31/NT31C, make sure that these settings can be adapted to
the NT31/NT31C used before transmission.
45
Section
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
3-6
3-6-1 Installation Method
Install the memory unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at the
rear of the NT31/NT31C as shown in the figure below. (The expansion interface
connector is located underneath the note label.)
Mounting screws
3-6-2 Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches,
and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to off.
OFF
OFF
SW1
Note
DIP Switch Functions
SW2
1. Always confirm that the power to the NT31/NT31C is off before setting the
DIP switches.
2. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.
The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table
below.
• SW1
Switch
Function
SW1 1
SW1-1
Automatic transmission (writing from the memory
unit to the PT)
OFF: Not executed
SW1 2
SW1-2
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to
the memory unit)
OFF: Not executed
SW1 3
SW1-3
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission
and bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
OFF: Not executed
SW1-4
Reserved for system use (must be set to OFF)
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
ON : Executed
• SW2
Switch
46
Function
SW2 1
SW2-1
Disable/enable writing to PT
SW2 2
SW2-2
Disable/enable writing to the memory unit
SW2 3
SW2-3
Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission.
transmission
SW2-4
Reserved for system use (must be set to OFF)
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Disable
ON : Enable
OFF: Bank 0
ON : Bank 1
Section
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
3-6
* The memory unit stores screen data for one PT in each area (bank 0,
bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3 sets which of
these two banks is used for automatic transmission.
Reference:
In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
• More than one of the SW1 switches are set to ON.
• None of the SW1 switches are set to ON.
In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
• Writing to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for SW2-1
or SW2-2.
For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to Errors
When Using a Memory Unit (page 3 to 25).
Writing Screen Data to a
Memory Unit Using
Automatic Transmission
(PT to Memory Unit)
In this mode, the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is forcibly written to the
memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation
is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the operation site is using the system.
Reference: When screen data is written to the memory unit, the data that has been stored in
the specified area up until that point is lost (there is no effect on the other area).
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT31/NT31C to the
memory unit by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the power supply to the NT31/NT31C is OFF, then set the DIP
switches of the memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in
NT31/NT31C.
1
2
3 4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
SW2-3
ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW 2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit. The screen
data in the NT31/NT31C is preserved.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
When messages Preparing, Transmitting, and Verifying are displayed, the
RUN LED flashes, and when the message Finished is displayed, the RUN
LED lights.
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit. To operate
NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Writing Screen Data to
the PT Using Automatic
Transmission (Memory
Unit to PT)
In this mode, screen data is forcibly written from the memory unit to the
NT31/NT31C irrespective of the setting status of the NT31/NT31C.
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool is
used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the same system program or
screen data to multiple NT31/NT31C, this mode becomes convenient.
47
Section
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
3-6
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C, the data that has been stored up until
that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the
NT31/NT31C by automatic transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the
memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in NT31/NT31C.
1
2
3 4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW2
SW1
SW2-3
ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the
memory unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
When messages Preparing, Transmitting, and Verifying are displayed, the
RUN LED flashes, and when the message Finished is displayed, the RUN
LED lights.
3. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, and remove the memory unit.
To operate NT31/NT31C continuously, switch the NT31/NT31C power back
ON.
Reading and Writing Data
by Manual Transmission
In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used
are set by touch switch operations at the NT31/NT31C. Transmission can be
executed while checking the settings.
Reference: When data is written to the NT31/NT31C or memory unit, the data that has been
stored up until that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to read and write screen data using manual transmission.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the NT31/NT31C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the
memory unit as follows.
1
2
3 4
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
SW1
SW2
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable to
set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data
is to be read.
48
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
Section
3-6
2. Switch the NT31/NT31C power ON.
The screen shown below is displayed.
(Example)
Current PT Screen Data
The comment for the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is displayed here.
Current Memory Unit Screen Data
The comments for the screen data in each area are displayed here.
Pressing the Trans. Direction Change and Bank Change touch switches changes the selections for the direction of transmission and the area of the memory
unit used.
3. Press Execute.
The data is transmitted.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed in accordance with the progress of data transmission.
4. Switch the NT31/NT31C power OFF, remove the memory unit, then switch
the NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Errors When Using a
Memory Unit
If an error occurs when using the memory unit, the NT31/NT31C operates as
follows.
• The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
• The continuous buzzer sounds.
• The RUN LED flashes.
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is possible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the
OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described above remains in effect until the NT31/NT31C power is turned OFF or reset.
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Mode setting error
DIP switches SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or
more than one is ON.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(automatic
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, set the memory unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT31/NT31C power back ON.
Protect setting error
(manual
transmission)
Writing to the data write
destination has been
prohibited by the setting
of SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Perform either of the following
procedures.
Press the OK touch switch to return to the memory unit manual
transmission screen, make the
correct settings, then try again.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, correct the DIP switches
settings of the memory unit, then
turn the power back ON.
49
Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the -Vj Suffix)
50
Section
3-6
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Flash memory error
An error occurred during
initialization of the
NT31/NT31C or memory
unit flash memory, or
during write processing.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
Verify error
An error occurred during
verification processing at
the flash memory of the
NT31/NT31C or the
memory unit.
Turn the NT31/NT31C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the unit.
SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.
4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
52
77
51
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
4-1
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The method for connecting between the RS-232C port of the PT and the
RS-232C port of the host is as follows.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PLCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PLCs,
refer to the PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor
Connection Manual (V060-E1-).
Direct Connection Between The RS-232C Ports Using an RS-232C Cable
(Page 109)
This is the easiest connection method. Depending on the host to which the connection is to be made, it may be possible to use OMRON cables with connectors.
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-232C cable (max. 15 m)
Reference: The CS-series CPU cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method. Use the 1:N connection NT link method instead to make the 1:1 connection.
For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 70) or Using the Highspeed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 73).
4-1-1 Host Types and Settings
The types of host that can be connected to a PT by using the RS-232C ports of
both units, and the settings to be made at the host, are described here.
When Using the Host Link Method
Compatible Host Units
52
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the host link function built in.
In the CS-series or CQM1H PLCs, the host link method can be used by installing
a Serial Communication Board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have
an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link method by installing a
Communication Board.
Check the model and series of the PLC, the type of installed Serial Communication Board, Serial Communication Unit, or Host Link Unit before making a connection.
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
The host units that can be connected to the NT31/NT31C by the host link method
using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
PLC Series
CS Series
Units with Built-in Host Link
Function
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
---
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/33-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE
---
C Series
CPUs Connectable with Host Link
Units or Expansion Communication
Board
C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33-E
---
C200HE-CPU42-E
C20HE-CPU42-ZE
C200HG-CPU43/63-E
C200HG-CPU43/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU44/64-E
C200HX-CPU44/64/65/85-ZE
C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000HF-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
-----
Host Link Unit/
Communication Board
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-SCB21
CS1W-SCB41
C120-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-EV1
---
C200HW-COM02/04/
05/06
EV1
05/06-EV1
C500-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
Connectable
to
CS1G
CS1H
C1000H
C2000H
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX-Z
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX-Z
C1000H
C2000H
C1000H (F)
C2000H
CPM1-10/20/30CDR-
+CPM1-CIF01
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CD-
+CPM1-CIF01
CPM2A-30/40/60CD-
+CPM1-CIF01
(Peripheral port connection)
CPM2C-10/20-
(*1)
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41/42/43/44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11/21/51/61 (*2)
---
---
---
---
---
---
CPM2A
---
---
CPM2C
---
---
CQM1
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CQM1H-SCB41
CQM1H
CPM1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
Se
CV Series (*3)
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1
Series
(*3)
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CV500-LK201
CVM1
CompoBus/S
master
control
unit
SRM1-C02-V1
---
---
SRM1
CV500-LK201
CV500
LK201
CV1000
CV2000
*1: Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter to connect.
*2: The CQM1H-CPU11 does not have a built-in RS-232C port, so connect to the peripheral port to the PT with a
CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable.
*3: CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV cannot be connected.
53
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Settings at the Host
4-1
When using the host link method, the settings shown below must be made at the
host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be necessary, or
settings not shown here may be necessary).
Item
Switch Setting
I/O port
RS-232C
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C. (*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page 158).
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
Connecting to a C-series Host Link Unit
C200H/C200HS/C200HE/HG/HX (-Z)E Backplane mounted type:
C200H-LK201-V1
Setting the Front Switches
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the
setting value window agree with the following.
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to 0.
SW2
SW1
0
0
5
2
SW3
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to 2.
SW4
@ Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.
Setting the Rear Switches
ON
CTS selector switch
External
0V (ON)
54
1
2
3
4
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch)
Set #3 to ON.
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
C1000H(F)/C2000H Backplane mounted type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Setting the Front Switches
Local
Host
Mode control (key switch)
Set this to host link.
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
I/O port
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
8
RS-422A
RS-232C
7
6
5
4
Synchronization
SW1
3
Internal
External
2
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
55
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
C1000H/C2000H Backplane mounted type: C500-LK203
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
5V supply
ON
OFF
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).
8
7
I/O port
6
RS-422A
RS-232C
5
4
SW1
3
2
Synchronization
Internal
External
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
56
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Setting the Rear Switches
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW1
SW2
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
SW3
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (DIP SW3-1 and SW3-2)
Set SW3-1 to ON (1), and SW3-2 to OFF (0).
(Set this always to 0V.)
@ Synchronization (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-3, and SW3-5 to ON (1), and SW3-4,
and SW3-6 to OFF (0). (Set these to Internal.)
Connecting to a CVM1/CV Series Host Link Unit
CVM1/CV series backplane mounted type: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communication ports 1 and 2). Either of these ports can be used for connection to an
NT31/NT31C by the RS-232C method. However, since the connectors at these
ports are of different types, a cable that matches the connector must be prepared.
• Communication port 1
Communication port 1 is a 25-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
• Communication port 2
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-232C method, the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS-232C
(the upper position).
CPU Bus Unit Settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following communication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C(*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1, 1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page158).
57
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series
Host Link Unit Operation Manual (W205-E1-).
Setting the Front Switches
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)
When using communication port 2, set these
switches to 0.
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
@ CTS selection (DIP SW2 and SW3)
Set SW2 or SW3 to ON. (Set this always to 0V.)
To use communication port 1, set SW2. To use
communication port 2, set SW3.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to OFF.
Communication is executed in accordance with the
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PLC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communication method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
Connecting to a CS-series Serial Communication Unit
CS-series Backplane mounted type: CS1W-SCU21
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT
No. 10
58
FE
C
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of
the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
m=DM30000+100×unit # (CH)
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
Port 2
m
m+10
m+1
m+11
m+2
m+6
Writing Value
Settings
8000
host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
0000
Communication speed 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed 19200 bps.
m+12
0000
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
m+16
0000
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link
Connecting to a CPU Unit
CV-series and CVM1/CV-series (-EV) CPU Units
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication
conditions for the PLC Setup.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C(*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page 158).
Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device to the
CPU.
For details on the PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/1000/2000
Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-).
59
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Setting the Front Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ System setting (DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch settings,
set SW4 to ON.
To effect the existing PLC Setup, set
SW4 to OFF.
Note
For CPUs manufactured before or during
June 1995 (lot No. 65), the existing
DIP switch settings differ from the
existing PLC Setup as follows.
- DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PLC Setup:
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7 bit
data length
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995
onward (lot No. 75), the stipulated
values in the DIP switch settings also are
9,600 bps and 2 stop bits.
C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1,
CQM1H CPUs, SRM1
The connection method depends upon the model of PLC being used, as shown
in the following table.
PLC model
Connection method
C200HS, CQM1
Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to one of the RS-232C ports (port A or port B) on a
Serial Communications Board.
CQM1H
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CS1W-CN118
Connecting Cable.
• Connect to the RS-232C port (port 1) on a Serial Communications Board.
CPM1
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter.
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter.
CPM2A, SRM1
CPM2C
Connect to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port or the peripheral
port through a Connecting Cable (CPM2C-CN111,
CS1W-CN118, or CS1W-CN114).
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communication Port
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port. A CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter is also required to connect to this
peripheral port.)
60
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
PLC Setup Area Settings
When connecting to a C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, or CQM1H CPU, or SRM1, set the following communication
conditions for the PLC Setup area.
Item
Setting at Host
Communication mode
Host link mode
Communications speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C(*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Settings the Host Link
Method (page158).
Set the PLC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. the
CX-Programmer support software).
For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PLC which is used.
The PLC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the
unit and port to which the connection is made are shown below.
CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1: Peripheral port connection
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6650
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6653
C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H (other than
the CPU11), or SRM1: Built-in RS-232C port connection
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6645
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6646
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6648
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board port A
CQM1H: Serial Communications Board port 1
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6555
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6556
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6558
61
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board port B
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6550
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6551
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6553
CPM1: Peripheral port connection through a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6650
0001
Host link mode
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6653
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CSseries PLCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using the
CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.
Port connecting to PT
PLC Setup
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
Peripheral port settings
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port settings
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CPM2C
CS1W-CN118
CPM2C
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Peripheral port
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the
PLC Setup area (data memory) effective.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1
CQM1H
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made
in PLC Setup effective.
62
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
When using the CQM1H’s built-in peripheral port, turn ON SW7.
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.
Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
Connecting PT to peripheral port
Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications settings
is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF
Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown in
the following diagram.
CPM1CIF01
CPM1
Set the mode setting switch to HOST (upper position).
63
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
CS-series CPU type : CS1G/H-CPU-E (-V1)
Connect to the built-in RS-232C port of the CPU, or the RS-232C port of the
communication board. Note that the connection to a peripheral port must be
made via an RS-232C adapter (CS1W-CN118) specially designed for connecting to a peripheral port.
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CS-series CPU, set the following communication conditions for the PLC Setup area. Since the settings shown below are the PLC default settings for the CPU, no change to the PLC Setup is necessary as long as
the communication speed is maintained at 9600 bps.
Item
Setting at Host
Communication speed
Set the same speed as set at the NT31/NT31C(*1)
Stop bits
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit No. for the host link
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Settings the Host Link
Method (page 158). When the communication speed is set to 19200 bps, the
PLC Setup of the CPU need to be changed.
Either set the PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming
Console), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU.
For details on PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS-series Operation Manual
(W339-E1-).
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
160
161
166
Writing Value
Settings
8000
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
0000
Communication speed: 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed: 19200 bps.
0000
Unit #00
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
144
145
150
64
Writing Value
Settings
8000
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
0000
Communication speed: 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed: 19200 bps.
0000
Unit #00
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU DIP switches to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31/NT31C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC
CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
Peripheral port
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
OPEN
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C unit connection.)
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the peripheral port.
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
RS-232C unit.
(This also supports the
CX-Programmer.)
PORT
Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS-series CPU
Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of
the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
Port 2
DM32000
DM32010
DM32001
DM32011
DM32002
DM32006
Writing Value
Settings
8000
Host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
0000
Communication speed 9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed 19200 bps.
DM32012
0000
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
DM32016
0000
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link
When Using the NT Link (1:1) Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the NT link (1:1) function built
in. With CQM1H PLCs, a Serial Communications Board can be added to provide
1:1 NT Link communications. Some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPUs can be connected by the NT link (1:1) method by installing a Communication Board.
Check the model and series of the PLC against the type of CPU before making
the connections.
65
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
The host units that can be connected to the NT31/NT31C by the NT link (1:1)
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
PLC Series
CPUs with Built-in
NT Link Function
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
CPUs Connectable with
Expansion
Communication
Board(*1)
Connectable
to
--C200HS
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG
(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
X200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX (-Z)E
CPM1-10CDR- (*2)
CPM1-20CDR- (*2)
CPM1-30CDR- (*2)
CPM1A-10CD- (*2)
CPM1A-20CD- (*2)
CPM1A-30CD- (*2)
CPM1A-40CD- (*2)
---
CPM2A-30CD-
CPM2A-40CD-
CPM2A-60CD-
---
CPM2C-10- (*3)
CPM2C-20- (*3)
---
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
---
CQM1H-CPU21-E
CQM1H-CPU51-E
CQM1H-CPU61-E
CQM1H-CPU51 (*4)
CQM1H-CPU61 (*4)
CQM1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
---
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
---
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
---
CV2000
---
(*5)
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CompoBus/S
master
control unit
SRM1-C02-V1
C series
CV series (*5)
CVM1 series
CPM1
CPM2A
CPM2C
CQM1
CVM1
--SRM1
*1 One of the following communication boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1.
*2 A CPM1-CIF01 adapter is required.
*3 Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.
*4 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
*5 CPUs of CVM1/CV series PLCs without the suffix -EV cannot be connected.
Reference: CS-series CPU cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT link method (standard or high-speed) instead to
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
(page 70) or Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 73).
66
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Settings at The Host
The setting methods for each unit are as follows:
Connecting to a C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, or SRM1
PLC Setup Area Settings
Write the PLC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming
Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software) in accordance with the host model and
port.
Host Model
Word #
RS-232C port of C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, SRM1
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E (*1)
Port 1 of CQM1H (*2)
Writing Value
Setting
DM6645
4000
DM6555
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E (*1)
DM6550
CPM1
DM6650
Use NT link
(1:1)
*1 RS-232C port of the Communication Board
*2 RS-232C port of the Serial Communications Board
For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PLC which is used.
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CSseries PLCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using the
CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.
Port connecting to PT
PLC Setup
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
Peripheral port settings
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port settings
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CPM2C
CS1W-CN118
CPM2C
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Peripheral port
Setting the DIP Switches on the Front of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1,
CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on
67
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the
PLC Setup area (data memory) effective.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1
CQM1H
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings
made in PLC Setup effective.
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.
Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
Connecting PT to peripheral port
Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications settings
is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF
Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown in
the following diagram.
CPM1CIF01
Set the mode setting switch to NT (lower position).
68
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Connecting to CVM1/CV Series (-EV)
Set the DIP switches on the front panel as follows.
I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
DIP switch setting (SW3)
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF
Set SW3 to use NT link
(ON, right side).
ON
ON
When using the CVM1/CV series, CPU execution processing (execution control
2) in the PLC Setup must be set to Simultaneous processing.
69
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected using the NT link (1:N) method are the
CS-series CS1G/H and the C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, and
SRM1 only. With the CS-series PLCs, it is possible to connect a 1:N NT Link using a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit.
Check the model and series of the PLC as well as the model of Serial Communications Board or Unit being used before making the connections.
The host units that can be connected to the NT31/NT31C by the NT link (1:N)
method using the RS-232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below.
CPUs with Built-in
NT Link Function
PLC Series
CS series
C series
CompoBus/S
Master
Control Unit
CPUs Connectable with
Communications Board
or Unit(*1)
Connectable
to
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/
CS1G
45-EV1
45-EV1
CS1H
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/
66/67-EV1
66/67-EV1
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE
(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG
(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*2)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*2)
C200HX
(-Z)E
---
CQM1H-CPU51(*3)
CQM1H-CPU61(*3)
CQM1H
SRM1-C02-V2
---
SRM1
*1 A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board or
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
*2 One of the following Communication Boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06 (-EV1)
*3 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
Reference: The -V1 versions of CS-series PLCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Link as well
as the standard 1:N NT Link. Furthermore, the high-speed 1:N NT Link can be
used in earlier versions of CS-series PLCs by installing a new version of Serial
Communications Board or Unit. For details, refer to Using the High-speed NT
Link (1:N) Method (page 73).
Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
• Connecting a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, or SRM1
PLC Setup Area Settings
Write the PLC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming
70
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software) in accordance with the host model and
port.
Connection to
Word #
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1
Writing
Value
Setting
DM6645
Built-in RS-232C port
Use NT link (1:N)
= highest unit number of
the connected PTs (1 to 7)
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communication Board port
A*1
DM6555 500
CQM1H port 1*2
((*3))
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communication Board port B*1
DM6550
*1 RS-232C port on the Communications Board
*2 RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board
*3 When using a C200HE (-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.
Refer to the PLC’s operation manual for details on changing PLC Setup settings.
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, the DIP switches on the front panel must
be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PLC Setup area (data
memory) effective.
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PLC
Setup effective.
Connecting to CS-series CPU Units
CS-series CPU Unit: CS1G/H-CPU-E(V1)
The PT is connected to the built-in RS-232C port on the CPU Unit or an RS-232C
port on a Communications Board. It can also be connected to the peripheral port
on the CPU Unit, but a CS1W-CN118 Peripheral Port Connecting Cable must be
used.
Connect to the built-in RS-232C port on the CPU Unit or to an RS-232C port on a
Communications Board. A special Peripheral Port Connecting Cable (CS1WCN118) can be used to connect to the peripheral port.
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CS-series CPU, set the following communication conditions for the PLC Setup area, in accordance with the communication port to be
used.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
160
Writing Value
8200
161
0000 to 0009
166
000
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
(*1)
Communications baud rate (standard)
= The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
71
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
144
Writing Value
8200
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
145
0000 to 0009
150
000
(*1)
Communications baud rate (standard)
= The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
When connecting PT with its model number 0, 2-5 to the built-in RS-232C port,
for example, set the value 8200 Hex to 160 CH, and 0005 Hex to 166CH.
Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Console), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU.
For details on PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS-series Operation Manual
(W339-E1-).
Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31/NT31C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
Peripheral port
OPEN
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C unit connection.)
RS-232 port
MCPWR
OPEN
BUSY
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the peripheral port.
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
This is used mainly for
connection to the
RS-232C unit.
(This also supports the
CX-Programmer.)
PORT
Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS-series CPU
Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CXProgrammer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
72
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
Port 2
DM32000
DM32010
Writing Value
8200
DM32001
DM32011
0000 to 0009
DM32006
DM32016
000
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
(*1)
Communications baud rate
(standard)
= The largest model number of
the connected PT (0 – 7)
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
When connecting PTs with model numbers 3 to 6 to port 1, for example, set the
value 8200 Hex to DM32000, 0000 Hex to DM32001, and 0006 Hex to
DM32006.
Connecting to CS Series Serial Communication Unit
A CS series backplane mounted type : CS1W-SCU21
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT
No. 32410
FE
D
C
567 9AB
8
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CXProgrammer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
m=DM30000+100*unit number (CH)
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
m
Port 2
m+10
Writing Value
8200
m+1
m+11
0000 to 0009
m+6
m+16
000
Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
(*1)
Communications baud rate
(standard)
= The largest model number of
the connected PT (0 - 7)
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
Only the -V1 versions of OMRON’s CS1H and CS1G PLCs support the highspeed 1:N NT Link directly. Other CS-series PLCs can use the high-speed 1:N
NT Link indirectly through a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit. (If a
Serial Communications Unit is used, even CS-series Units without the “-V1” suffix can be connected via high-speed 1:N NT Link.)
73
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Be sure to check the model number of the PLC and Serial Communications
Board/Unit before trying to establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
The following table shows which CS-series PLCs can be connected to an
NT31/NT31C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
CPU Units with Built-in
NT Link Function
CPUs Connectable only through a
Serial Communication Board or Unit
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1 (*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1 (*1)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1) (*2)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1) (*2)
*1 The high-speed 1:N NT Link is not supported in a direct connection to the CPU
Unit of a CS-series PLC without the -V1 suffix.
*2 A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board or
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
• Connecting CS-series CPU Units
CS series CPU type : CS1G/H-CPU-EV1
Connect to the built-in RS-232C port on the CPU Unit or to an RS-232C port on a
Communications Board. A special Peripheral Port Connecting Cable (CS1WCN118) can be used to connect to the peripheral port.
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CS series CPU, set the following communication conditions for the PLC Setup area, in accordance with the communication port to be
used.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
160
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
161
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
166
000
= The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
When using the peripheral port of CS1G/H
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
144
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
145
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
150
000
= The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
When connecting PTs with model numbers 0, 2, 3, 4, and 5 to the built-in
RS-232C port, for example, set the value 8200 Hex to word 160, 000A Hex to
word 161, and 0005 Hex to word 166.
Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Console), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU.
For details on PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS-series Operation Manual
(W339-E1-).
Reference: When using the CX-Programmer to set the high-speed 1:N NT Link, set the communications baud rate to 115,200 bps.
74
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31/NT31C is
connected to.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
Peripheral port
OPEN
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports
connection of RS-232C
devices.)
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communication in accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the peripheral port.
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communication in accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT31/NT31C to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection of RS-232C
devices.
(This also supports the
connection of
CX-Programmer.)
PORT
Connecting to a CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS-series CPU
Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CXProgrammer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM area (CH)
Writing
Value
Settings
Port 1
Port 2
DM32000
DM32010
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
DM32001
DM32011
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
DM32006
DM32016
000
= The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 1,
set the value 8200 Hex to DM32000, 000A Hex to DM32001, and 0006 Hex to
DM32006.
Connecting to a CS-series Serial Communication Unit
A CS-series backplane mounted type : CS1W-SCU21
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
75
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch
located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that
the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT
No. 32410
FE
D
C
567 9AB
8
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CXProgrammer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Word m = DM30000 + (100 × unit number)
Allocation DM area (CH)
Port 1
When Using the Memory
Link Method
Port 2
Writing
Value
Settings
m
m+10
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
m+1
m+11
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
m+6
m+16
000
= The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 - 7)
In the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal computer
with RS-232 and an FA computer, etc.
When connecting to the host in the memory link method, it is necessary to create
a program for the memory link at the host side.
The following are the communication conditions that can be used in the memory
link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.), its setting
should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in the following table. Set the same communication conditions at the NT31/NT31C by the
memory switch. (page 163).
Item
76
Settings at the host
Input/Output port
RS-232C
Communication speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
Data bits length
7 bits, 8 bits
Stop bits length
1 bits, 2 bits
Parity
None, even, odd
Flow control
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
4-1-2 Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports
The method for connection between the RS-232C ports of the NT31/NT31C and
the host is described here.
Host link unit/CPU
NT31/NT31C
SYSMAC
CS-series PLC
C-series PLC,
CVM1/CV-series
PLC, SRM1
9-pin connector
or 25-pin
connector
Serial port A (RS-232C, 9-pin type)
Serial port B (RS-232C, 25-pin type)
9-pin connector
Cable with RS-232C connectors
Recommended Connector Cable
When making the connector cable, as far as possible use the recommended
connectors, connector hoods, and cables indicated in the table below. Some
units come supplied with one connector and one connector hood.
Check the required components and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Remarks
Delivered with
CS-series CS1G/CS1H
XM2A-0901
9-pin
Made by OMRON
C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
Connector
XM24-2501
25-pin
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
DB-25P
25-pin
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
XM2S-0911
9-pin
Made by OMRON
C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
Connector
hood
Cable
XM2S-0913
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-0911-E
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-2511
25-pin
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
DB-C2-J9
25-pin
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P 28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Hitachi Cable,
Ltd.
CS-series CS1G/CS1H
Note After connecting a communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
77
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
OMRON Cables with Connectors
When a connection is made at serial port A in other than the memory link method, OMRON cables with connectors shown below are available.
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
XW2Z-200T
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
Connector Specification
9 pin ⇔ 25 pin
9-pin
9 pin ⇔ 9-pin
9-pin
9 pin
When a connection is made to a personal computer at serial port A in the
memory link method, OMRON cable with connectors shown below are available.
Model
Cable Length
Connector Specification
CV500-CN228
2m
9-pin ⇔ 25 pin
XW2Z-S002
2m
9-pin ⇔ 9 pin
When a connection is made at serial port B in other than the memory link method, OMRON cables with connectors shown are available.
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200P
2m
XW2Z-500P
5m
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
Connector Specification
25 pin ⇔ 25 pin
25-pin
25 pin ⇔ 9-pin
9 pin
25-pin
Note The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Wiring for a Host Link
Unit (25-pin) Connection
78
Applicable units: C200H-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port B:
XW2Z-200P (25-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500P (25-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
CVM1/CV-series host link units (CV500-LK201) have two types of connector; a
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communication port 2). When using communication port 2, refer to Wiring for Other Connections (Other Than the Memory Link Method) (page79).
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Serial Port A
1
6
NT31/NT31C
Abbreviation
FG
RS-232C
interface
Pin
number
Connector
hood
9
Shielding wire
Pin
number
Abbreviation
1
FG
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
+5V
6
5G
5
PLC (host link unit)
*
6
–
7
5G
7
8
–
8
–
–
9
–
–
(9-pin type)
–
–
–
ER
1
14
13
25
RS-232C
interface
(25-pin type)
* For units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to be
shorted if this switch is set to 0V.
Serial Port B
NT31/NT31C
Abbreviation
FG
1
14
RS-232C/
422A/485
interface
Pin
number
Connector
hood
PLC (host link unit)
Shielding wire
Pin
number
Abbreviation
1
FG
–
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
–
*
6
–
6
7
SG
SG
7
8
–
–
8
–
–
TRM
–
–
RDB (+)
9
10
–
–
SDB (+)
11
–
–
–
12
20
ER
–
13
–
14
SDA (–)
15
RDA (–)
16
1
14
13
25
RS-232C
interface
(25-pin
type)
–
13
25
–
–
RSB (+)
23
RSA (–)
–
24
25
(25-pin type)
* For units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to be
shorted if this switch is set to 0V.
Wiring for Other
Connections
Applicable units :
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
CS1W-SCU21
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1A-10CD-
CPM1A-20CD-
CPM1A-30CD-
CPM1A-40CD-
CPM2A-30CD-
CPM2A-40CD-
CPM2A-60CD-
CPM2C-10- CPM2C-20-
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
79
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CUP67-E(V1)
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V2
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 5 m)
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port B:
XW2Z-200S (25-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (25-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 5 m)
CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV cannot be connected by
any connection method.
When connecting to the peripheral port of a CS-series CPU Unit, a CS1WCN118 Connecting Cable is required in addition to the above cables.
Serial Port A
1
6
NT31/NT31C
Pin
Abbreviation number
Connector
FG
hood
RS-232C
interface
5
80
9
PLC (Host link unit)
Shielding wire
Pin
number
Abbreviation
1
FG
–
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
CS
5
+5V
–
5
CS
6
+5V
6
7
7
8
DSR
ER
–
8
9
SG
9
(9-pin type)
*
1
6
5
9
RS-232C
interface
SG
(9-pin type)
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
4-1
Serial Port B
NT31/NT31C
1
13
14
25
PLC (Host link unit)
Shielding wire
Abbreviation
FG
FG
–
1
1
–
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
–
6
6
–
SG
7
7
–
–
8
8
–
TRM
9
SG
RDB (+)
9
10
SDB (+)
11
–
12
–
13
–
14
SDA (–)
15
RDA (–)
16
*
1
6
5
9
(9-pin type)
–
–
–
RSB (+)
23
RSA (–)
–
24
25
(25-pin type)
* In case 0V is set for those unit which has CTS setting selector, it is not necessary
to shorten between RS and CS.
Wiring for a Memory Link
Connection
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
CV500-CN228 (9-pin⇔25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-S002 (9-pin⇔9-pin, 2 m)
Serial Port A
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
NT31/NT31C
1
6
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C
connector
5
9
PLC (Host link unit)
Shielding wire
Abbreviation
Connector
hood
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
SD
2
RD
RD
3
RS
RS
4
CS
CS
5
SG
+5V
6
−
7
−
8
SG
9
RS-232C
connector
(9-pin type)
81
Section
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Serial Port B
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
NT31/NT31C
1
Abbreviation Pin number
14
25
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
–
1
SD
SD
2
RD
RS-232C
/422A/485
RD
3
RS
connector
RS
4
CS
CS
5
SG
–
6
SG
7
–
8
TRM
9
10
SDB (+)
11
–
12
–
13
–
14
SDA (–)
15
RDA (–)
16
–
–
–
RSB (+)
23
RSA (–)
–
24
25
(25-pin type)
82
Abbreviation
FG
RDB (+)
13
PLC (Host link unit)
Shielding wire
RS-232C
connector
4-1
SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.
5-1
5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 The Type of Host and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at the Host . . . . .
5-1-3 1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at the Host . . . .
5-1-4 Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4 1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5 1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-6 Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
85
86
90
95
97
98
99
115
119
120
123
125
126
127
83
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
5-1
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C and the
RS-232C port of the host are described here. There are the following methods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PLCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PLCs,
refer to the PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor
Connection Manual (V060-E1-).
• Method in which the RS-422A port of the NT31/NT31C and the RS-232C port
of the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 86).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
PT
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 port of the NT31/NT31C and the RS-232C port of
the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 86).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
This connection method can be used only with the NT link (1:N) method of
type RS-485.
PT
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the
RS-232C port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (page 90).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) method.
PT
RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit
RS-422A cable
(max. total length
500 m)
Host
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the RS-232C
port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit (page 90).
This connection method is used with the RS-485 type NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).
PT
RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit
RS-485 cable
(max. total length
500 m)
84
RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)
Host
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PLC), and there must
be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays
and communication failures.
PLC
PLC
(At termination)
PLC
Relay terminal block
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
NT31C
NT31
NT31
(Not at
(Not at
termination) termination) (Not at
termination)
NT31
NT31
NT31C
NT31
NT31
NT31C
NT31
(At
termination)
Example of Good Connection
Examples of Bad Connections
Reference: CS-series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT Link method (standard or high-speed) instead to
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT link (1:N) method
(page 70) or Using the High-speed NT link (1:N) method (page 73).
5-1-1 The Type of Host and Settings
The using condition is the same as the connecting PT side RS-232C and the
host side RS-232C.
For the available type and settings of the host, refer to the pages listed below.
Method
Reference
Host link
Host Link Method (page 52)
NT link (1:1)
NT Link (1:1) method (page 65)
NT link (1:N)
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 70)
High-speed NT link (1:N) Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 73)
Memory link
Memory Link Method (page 76)
85
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Settings at the
RS-232C/RS-422A
Convertor Unit
(NT-AL001)
5-1
When making a connection between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 ports using an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit, set the DIP switches on the NT-AL001 as follows.
Example: the terminal resistor is active,
RS-422A, NT link (1:N).
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
omR on
NT-AL001
Built-in terminal resistor setting (DIP SW1-2)
If at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to ON (to
activate the built-in terminal resistor).
If not at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch to
OFF (to inactivate the built-in terminal resistor).
2-wire type/4-wire type selection (DIP SW1-3, SW1-4)
For RS-422A, set both of these switches to OFF (4-wire type).
For RS-485, set both of these switches to ON (2-wire type).
Selection of RS-422A/485 send mode (DIP SW1-5, SW1-6)
For host link or NT link (1:1), set both of these switches to
OFF. (Always send)
For NT link (1:N), set SW1-5 to OFF and SW1-6 to ON.
(Sends when CS is H)
Note Read the manual supplied with the NT-AL001 carefully before using the unit.
5-1-2 1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at
the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 port of an NT31/NT31C and
the RS-232C port of a host are connected via a convertor unit is described here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between
the RS-232C and RS-422A communication methods.
Host link unit/CPU
NT31/NT31C
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485,
25-pin type)
SYSMAC
C-series PLC,
CVM1/CV-series PLC, SRM1
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
25-pin connector
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. length: 500 m)
RS-422A terminal block
9-pin connector or
25-pin connector
RS-232C cable
with connectors
9-pin connector
Reference: When using RS-485 as a port for the NT31/NT31C, only NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) can be used.
86
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
NT31/NT31C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-422A
NT31/NT31C side
1
Abbreviation Pin number
14
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
−
8
Shielding wire
8
7
6
connector
13
5
4
3
2
TRM
9
RDB (+)
10
6
RDA
SDB (+)
11
5
RDB
−
12
4
SDA
−
13
3
SDB
−
14
1
Functional
ground
SDA (−)
15
RDA (−)
16
25
1
NT-AL001 side
Pin number Abbreviation
RS-422A
terminal
block
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
(25-pin type)
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and NT-AL001 (RS-485)
NT31/NT31C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-485
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
1
14
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
−
8
8
7
6
connector
25
4
3
2
1
NT-AL001 side
TRM
9
RDB (+)
10
6
RDA
SDB (+)
11
5
RDB
−
12
4
SDA
−
13
3
SDB
−
14
1
Functional
ground
SDA (−)
15
RDA (−)
16
−
13
5
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
Pin number Abbreviation
RS-422A
terminal
block
Shielding wire
(25-pin type)
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
Reference: When using RS-485 as a port for the NT31/NT31C, only NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) can be used.
87
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-232C
Wiring When Connecting a Host Link Unit (25-pin)
Applicable units:
C200H-LK201-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communication port 1)
CVM1/CV-series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two types of connector: a
25-pin connector (communication port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communication port 2). When using the communication port, refer to Wiring for Connections
other than Memory Link (page 88).
PLC (host link unit) side
NT-AL001 side
1
Abbreviation Pin number
6
RS-232C
connector
FG
Connector
hood
9
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
FG
1
FG
−
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
6
−
+5V
6
7
SG
−
7
8
−
−
8
−
−
SG
9
−
−
(9-pin type)
5
Abbreviation Pin number
1
14
13
25
RS-232C
connector
−
−
−
20
ER
(25-pin type)
Wiring for Connections Other Than Memory Link
Applicable units:
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
CS1W-SCU21
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1A-10CD-
CPM1A-30CD-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1A-20CD-
CPM1A-40CD-
CPM2A-30CD-
CPM2A-40CD-
CPM2A-60CD-
CPM2C-10-
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CPM2C-20-
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
88
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HE-CPU32-ZE
C200HE-CPU42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33-ZE
C200HG-CPU43-ZE
C200HG-CPU53-ZE
C200HG-CPU63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-ZE
C200HX-CPU44-ZE
C200HX-CPU54-ZE
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V2
C200HX-CPU64-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
5-1
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:
• For host link and 1:1 NT Link only (+5 V power wire attached)
SJ45007-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
SSJ45007-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
• For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PLC)
XW2Z-070T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
SJ46006-102 (9-pin to 9-pin, 1 m)
SSJ46006-202 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix -EV cannot be connected by any connection method.
When connecting to the peripheral port of a CS-series CPU Unit, a CS1WCN118 Connecting Cable is required in addition to the above cables. (Supply
power to the +5 V output of the NT-AL001 from an external power supply when
using this method.)
1
6
NT-AL001 side
PLC side
RS-232C
connector
5
9
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
1
−
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
+5V
6
6
(+5V)
−
7
7
−
−
8
8
−
SG
9
9
SG
(9-pin type)
1
6
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
Abbreviation Pin number
Shielding wire
(9-pin type)
RS-232C
connector
When there is no +5 V output at the PLC side
9
5
When using host link or NT link (1:1)
When there is +5 V output at the PLC side
When using NT link (1:N)
• When using the host link or NT link (1:1) method, short the RS and CS terminals at the PLC side with each other (leave the RS and CS terminals at the NTAL001 side open).
• When using the NT link (1:N), cross-connect the RS and CS terminals at the
NT-AL001 and PLC sides.
89
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
If there is +5 V output at the PLC side, no external power supply is required
for the NT-AL001.
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the diagram shown below.
Host side
NT-AL001 side
6
1
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C
connector
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
SD
2
RD
RD
3
RS
RS
4
CS
CS
5
(+5V)
+5V
6
SG
−
7
−
8
SG
9
(9-pin type)
Connector
hood
RS-232C
connector
Shielding wire
9
5
No +5 V output is at the host side
A +5 V output is present at the host side
Since it is necessary to input a voltage of +5 V to the number 6 pin of NT-AL001,
supplying a voltage of 5 V from the host or an external voltage supply for NTAL001 is required.
5-1-3 1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at
the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 ports of multiple
NT31/NT31Cs are connected to the RS-232C port of one host in a 1:N connection is described here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001) is used to convert between
the RS-232C and RS-422A/485 communication methods.
Host link unit/CPU
NT31/NT31C
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Serial port B
(RS-422A/485,
25-pin type)
25-pin connector
RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
9-pin connector
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
RS-232C cable with
connectors
RS-422A terminal
block
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. total length: 500 m)
90
9-pin connector
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
Connecting an
NT31/NT31C and
NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
NT31/NT31C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-422A
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
Shielding wire
8
7
6
5
connector
13
25
−
6
SG
7
4
3
2
1
NT-AL001 side
−
8
TRM
9
RDB (+)
10
6
RDA
RDB (+)
11
5
RDB
−
12
4
SDA
−
13
3
SDB
1
Functional
ground
−
14
SDA (−)
15
RDA (−)
16
Pin number Abbreviation
RS-422A
terminal
block
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
(25-pin type)
Next PT
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
91
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
Connecting an
NT31/NT31C and
NT-AL001 (RS-485)
NT31/NT31C
NT-AL001
Host
RS-485
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
13
25
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
Shielding wire
8
7
6
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
−
8
TRM
9
RDB (+)
10
6
RDA
SDB (+)
11
5
RDB
−
12
RS-422A
terminal
4
SDA
block
−
13
3
SDB
−
14
1
Functional
ground
SDA (−)
15
RDA (−)
16
5
4
3
2
1
NT-AL001 side
Pin number Abbreviation
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
(25-pin type)
Next PT
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
92
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
Connection between
NT31/NT31C Units
(RS-422A)
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-422A
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
13
25
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
−
1
1
−
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
−
6
6
−
7
7
SG
8
−
9
TRM
10
10
RDB (+)
11
11
RDB (+)
−
12
12
−
−
13
13
−
−
14
14
−
SDA (−)
15
15
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
16
16
RDA (−)
−
−
8
9
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
23
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
24
24
RSA (−)
−
25
25
(25-pin type)
13
25
FG
SG
−
14
Pin number Abbreviation
FG
TRM
1
NT31/NT31C side
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
−
−
(25-pin type)
*2
Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the terminal NT31/NT31C
(marked in the figure above) only.
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
93
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
Connection between
NT31/NT31C Units
(RS-485)
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-485
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
13
25
Shielding wire
FG
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
−
1
1
−
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
−
6
6
−
SG
7
7
SG
−
8
8
−
TRM
9
9
TRM
RDB (+)
10
10
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
11
11
SDB (+)
−
12
12
−
−
13
13
−
−
14
14
−
SDA (−)
15
15
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
16
16
RDA (−)
−
−
−
14
13
25
FG
SD
1
Pin number Abbreviation
−
−
RSB (+)
23
23
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
24
24
RSA (−)
−
25
25
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
−
(25-pin type)
−
(25-pin type)
*2
Make the connection pin numbers 9 and 10 at the terminal NT31/NT31C (marked
in the figure above).
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
NT31/NT31C
Host
NT-AL001
RS-232C
Wiring when connecting a CS-series CS1G/H Serial Communications Board,
CQM1H Serial Communications Board, or C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board.
Applicable PLCs:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
94
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
5-1
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
CQM1H-CPU51
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CQM1H-CPU61
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:
• For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PLC)
XW2Z-070T-1
XW2Z-200T-1
SJ46006-102
SSJ46006-202
1
6
NT-AL001 side
PLC side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C
connector
5
9
(9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
(9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
(9-pin to 9-pin, 1 m)
(9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
Shielding wire
FG
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
−
1
1
−
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
+5V
6
6
+5V
−
7
7
−
−
8
8
−
SG
9
9
SG
(9-pin type)
6
1
Pin number Abbreviation
FG
RS-232C
connector
(9-pin type)
9
5
Since the CS1G/H, CQM1H, and C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have a +5 V output,
no external power supply is required for the NT-AL001.
5-1-4 Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-232C
When making an RS-232C connecting cable, as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied with one
connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Remarks
Delivered with
XM2A-0901
9-pin type
Made by OMRON
CS-series CS1G/H
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
XM2A-2501
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1
DB-25P
25-pin type
Made by JAE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Connector
95
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Name
Connector
hood
Model
Delivered with
XM2S-0911
9-pin type
Made by OMRON
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CVM1/CV-series CPUs
CV500-LK201
XM2S-0913
Made by OMRON 9-pin
---
XM2S-0911-E
Made by OMRON 9-pin
CS series CS1G/CS1H
XM2S-2511
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
C500-LK203
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1
25-pin type
DB-C2-J9
Cable
Remarks
5-1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Made by JAE
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable
--Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P 28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable
--Made by Hitachi, Ltd.
Cables with Connectors Made by OMRON
When connecting an NT-AL001 and a PLC, use the OMRON cables with connectors indicated in the table below.
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-070T-1
0.7 m
2m
XW2Z-200T-1
Connector Specification
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Host link, NT link (1:1), NT link (1:N)
+5 V power supplied from PLC
(Use when the PLC has a +5 V output.)
Note The maximum tensile load of the recommended cable is 30 N. Do not exceed
this load.
• After connecting a connecting cable, always tighten the connector screws.
• Recommended connectors, cables and crimp terminals for RS-422A/485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the
recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some units come supplied
with one connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Maker
XM2A-2501
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
Delivered with the following
units:
C500-LK203
DB-25P F-N
25-pin type
Made by JAE
Delivered with the following
units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
XM2S-2511
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
Delivered with the following
units:
C500-LK203
Connector
Connector
hood
DB-C2-J9
Cable
96
Remarks
TKVVBS4P-03
25-pin type
Made by JAE
Tachii Electric
Wire Co., Ltd.
Delivered with the following
units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Name
Crimp
terminals
Model
Maker
5-1
Remarks
1.25-N3A
(fork type)
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG
Y1.25-3.5L
(fork type)
Molex Inc.
Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to
t 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm2)
The terminal screws of the NT-AL001 are M3 specification. When wiring,
use crimp terminals for M3 use. Tighten terminal screws with a tightening
torque of 0.5 N@m.
Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring.
Examples of applicable terminals
Round type
Fork type
6.2 mm or less
6.2 mm or less
5-1-5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT31/NT31C has a terminal resistance setting
terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.
The NT31/NT31C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal
resistance is applied is set by the wiring at the terminal resistance setting terminals (pins No. 9 and 10 of serial port B). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω. When
carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between
terminals No. 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Leave terminals No. 9 and 10 open at NT31/NT31C units other than the one at
the end of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting
is ineffective.
In order to set the terminal resistance, wiring work is required at the cable’s connector: carry out the wiring correctly by referring to APPENDIX E Making the
Cable, page 267.
Abbreviation Pin number
FG
Connector
hood
-
-
TRM
9
RDB (+)
10
SDB (+)
11
-
12
Terminal resistor setting
-
Pin Nos. 9 and 10
25
Function
Terminal resistance is applied.
Shorted
Short only at the NT31/NT31C connected to the end of an
RS-422A/485 cable.
Terminal resistance is not applied.
Open
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT31/NT31C
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT31/NT31C, PLC, etc.) is OFF.
97
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Reference:
5-2
The internal circuit of the NT31/NT31C is shown below.
+
−
10 (RDB)
16 (RDA)
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and − (RDA).
9 (TRM)
For details on setting the terminal resistance of NT-AL001-E, refer to Settings
at the RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit (NT-AL001-E) (page 86).
5-2
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C and the
RS-422A/485 port of the host are described here. There are the following methods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PLCs
(By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any arbitrary
RS-422 unit). When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PLCs,
refer to the PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-) or Multi Vendor Connection
Manual (V060-E1-).
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of the NT31/NT31C and host are connected directly by an RS-422A cable (page 115).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
PT
Host
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 ports of the NT31/NT31C and host are connected
by an RS-485 cable (page 119).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to 500 m.
This connection method can be used only with the NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) of type RS-485.
PT
Host
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the
RS-422A port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 120).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).
PT
Host
RS-422A cable
(max. total length 500 m)
• Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs and the RS-485
port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 123).
98
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
This connection method is used with the RS-485 type NT link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).
PT
Host
RS-485 cable
(max. total length 500 m)
Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PLC), and there must
be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays
and communication failures.
PLC
PLC
(At termination)
PLC
Relay terminal block
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
NT31C
NT31
NT31
(Not at
(Not at
termination) termination) (Not at
termination)
NT31
NT31
NT31C
NT31
NT31
NT31C
NT31
(At
termination)
Example of Good Connection
Examples of Bad Connections
Reference: CS-series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link method.
Use the 1:N connection NT link method (standard or high-speed) instead to
make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT link (1:N) Method
(page 111) or Using the High-speed NT link (1:N) Method (page 113).
5-2-1 Host Types and Settings
The types of host that have an RS-422A port and can be connected to the
RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C, and the settings to be made at the host,
are described here.
When Using the Host Link Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the RS-422A/485 type host link
function built in. With the CS-series and CQM1H, the host link method can be
used by installing a serial communication board. In addition, some C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E devices have an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link
method by installing a communication board.
With the CPM2A and CPM2C, an RS-422A type of 1:1 NT Link can be created
through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Check the model and series of the PLC and the type of the installed Board or Unit
before making a connection.
99
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
The host units featuring the RS-422A/485 type host link function and can be connected to the RS-422A/485 port of the NT31/NT31C are indicated in the table
below.
Units with Built-in Host Link Function
PLC Series
CS series
Host Link Unit /
Communication Board
CPUs Connectable with
Host Link Units or Expansion
Communication Board
CPU
CS1W-SCB41-E
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G
CS1H
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
C200H-LK202-V1
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/33-E
C200HS-CPU01/21-EC
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C200HX
C200HX-ZE
C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/85-ZE
C200HX
C200HX-ZE
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
C500-LK203
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H
C2000H
C200HW-COM03/06-EV1
C series
CPM1-10/20/30CDR-
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM1
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CD-
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM2A-30/40/60CD-
+CPM1-CIF11
(Peripheral port connection)
CPM2A
CPM2C-10/20- (*1)
CQM1H-SCB41
CV series
i
((*2)
2)
CVM1 series (*2)
SRM1
Connectable
to
CV500-LK201
CV500-LK201
CPM2C
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CQM1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
SRM1-C02-V1+CPM1-CIF11
SRM1
*1: Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter to connect.
*2: CPUs of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV cannot be connected.
The host link method cannot be used when an NT31/NT31C is connected using
RS-485. To use the host link method, connect by RS-422A.
Settings at the Host
When using the RS-422A type host link method, the settings shown below must
be made at the host (depending on the unit, some of these settings may not be
necessary, or settings not shown here may be necessary).
Item
100
Setting at Host
I/O port
RS-422A
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C. (*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Item
5-2
Setting at Host
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting
the Host Link Method (page 156).
*2 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
Connecting to a C Series Host Link Unit
C200H/C200HS/C200HE(-Z)E/C200HG(-Z)E/C200HX(-Z)E
Backplane mounting type: C200H-LK201-V1
Setting the Front Switches
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the
setting value window agree with the following:
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
SW1
@ Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to 0.
SW2
0
0
5
2
SW3
SW4
@ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to 2.
@ Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.
Setting the Rear Switches
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
Terminator
ON
OFF
1-to-1 (ON)
1-to-N (OFF)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N protocol selection (selector switch)
Set this switch to 1-to-N (OFF).
101
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Setting the Front Switches
Mode
selector
Host Local
@ Mode selector (key switch)
Set this to Host link.
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
I/O port
8
RS-422A
RS-232C
7
6
5
SW1
4
Synchronization
3
2
Internal
External
@ Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
1
ON
Terminator
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
8
7
OFF
ON
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
102
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
C1000H/C2000H rack-mounting type: C500-LK203
Setting the Rear Switches
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
5V supply
ON
OFF
8
SW1
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).
7
I/O port
6
RS-422A
RS-232C
5
4
3
2
Synchronization
Internal
External
1
ON
Terminator
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
@ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
SW2
@ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6-LK202-EV1
Setting the Rear Switches
@ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
@ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW1
SW2
@ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
SW3
@ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW3-1 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-1, SW3-3, and SW3-5 to ON (1).
Set SW3-2, SW3-4, and SW3-6 to OFF (0).
(Set terminator ON.)
103
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Connecting to a CVM1/CV Series Host Link Unit
CVM1/CV series rack-mounting type: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communication ports 1 and 2). To use the RS-422A type host link method, set communication port 2 to RS-422A.
Communication port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-422A method,
the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS-422A (the
lower position).
CPU Bus Unit Settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following communication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C. (*1)
Transfer code
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N(*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting
the Host Link Method (page 156).
*1 The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT31/NT31C in a single host link.
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series
Host Link Unit Operation Manual (W205-E1-).
104
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Setting the Front Switches
@ Unit # (SW3, SW4)
Set these switches to 0.
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
I/O port selector switch
@ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to OFF.
Communication is executed in accordance with the
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PLC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9,600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communication method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
@ Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this to ON.
Connecting to a CPU Unit
CVM1/CV-series (-EV) CPUs
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communication
conditions for the PLC Setup.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C. (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting
the Host Link Method (page 156).
Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. SYSMAC support software), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device to the
CPU.
For details on the PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/
CV2000 Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-).
105
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Setting the Front Switches
@ Host link communication method
selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)
Set SW3 to OFF.
(for host link communication)
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
@ Host link default value settings
(DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch
settings, set SW4 to ON.
To effect the values set in the PLC
Setup, set SW4 to OFF.
Note
For CPUs manufactured before or
during June 1995 (lot No. 65), the
existing DIP switch settings differ from
the PLC Setup default values as follows.
- Existing DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PLC Setup default values:
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7
bit data length
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995
onward (lot No. 75), the stipulated
values in the DIP switch settings also
are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits.
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to ON.
(Set terminator ON.)
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1
The connection method depends upon the model of PLC being used, as shown
in the following table.
PLC model
Connection method
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
• Connect to the RS-422A port (port A) on a Communications
Board.
• Connect to the RS-422A port (port 2) on a Serial Communications Board.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
• Connect to the peripheral port (on a CPM2C-CN111 or
CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable) through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
CQM1H
CPM1
CPM2A, SRM1
CPM2C
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communication Port
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port.)
Reference:
There are no Communication Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E in which
port B is the RS-422A port.
There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is
the RS-422A port.
PLC Setup Area Settings
When connecting to a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E or CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C,
106
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
CQM1H CPUs or SRM1, set the following communication conditions for the PLC
Setup area.
Item
Setting at Host
I/O port
RS-422A
Communication mode
Host link mode
Communications speed
Set the same speed as for the NT31/NT31C. (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits
Parity
Even
Data length
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
*1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed at the NT31/NT31C. For details, refer to Setting the Host Link
Method (page 156).
Set the PLC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CXProgrammer).
For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PLC which is used.
The PLC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the
unit to which the connection is made are shown below.
When using port A of the communication board of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6555
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6556
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6558
When using a CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6650
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6651
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6653
When using a CQM1H
Word #
Writing Value
Settings
DM6550
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communication conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6551
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6553
107
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CSseries PLCs. The CPM2C’s communication port handles both RS-232C and peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when using the
CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections,
according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details.
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C
CPM2C
CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
Setting Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.
Switch 1:
Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Switch 2 :
Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Terminator (TERM):
Set to ON for termination ON.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side).
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
Set to 4 (right side).
Setting the Switches on an RS-422A Adapter
CPM1CIF11
CPM1
Set the terminator selector switch to ON (upper position).
Connecting to a CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS-series
CPU Type :
CS1W-SCB41 (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing
the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings
are shown.
108
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Allocation DM
area (CH)
Writing Value
5-2
Settings
Port 2
DM32010
8000
Host link mode, 2 stop bits, data length 7 bits,
even parity,
DM32011
0000
Communication speed
9600 bps.
0007
Communication speed
19200 bps.
DM32012
0000
Transmit delay time
0 ms.
DM32016
0000
No CTS control
Unit No.0 for host link
Using the NT Link (1:1) Method
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the RS-422A type NT link (1:1)
function built in.
• The C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPUs can be connected by the RS-422A type NT
link (1:1) method by installing a Communications Board.
• The CQM1H CPUs can be connected by the RS-422A type NT link (1:1) method by installing a Serial Communications Board.
Check the model and series of the PLC against the type of CPU before making
the connections.
The host units that can be connected to the RS-422A port of the NT31/NT31C by
the RS-422A type NT link (1:1) method are indicated in the table below.
PLC
Series
C series
CV series
i
((*2)
2)
CVM1
series (*2)
CPUs with Built-in RS-422A type NT
Link (1:1) Function
Model Name
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HE (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
C200HX (-Z)E
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CQM1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
*1 One of the following communication boards is required:
C200HW-COM03-EV1 or C200HW-COM06-EV1.
*1 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
*1 CPUs of CVM1/CV series PLCs without the suffix -EV cannot be connected.
The NT link (1:1) method cannot be used using RS-485. To use the NT link (1:1)
method, connect by RS-422A.
NT link connection using RS-422A/485 is not possible with CPM1.
Settings at the Host
The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following.
109
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
• Connecting to a CVM1/CV-series (-EV) CPUs
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PLC Setup
When connecting to the CVM1/CV series CPU by the NT link (1:1) method, no
particular settings are required at the PLC Setup.
Setting the Front Switches
@ Host link communication method selection
(selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
@ Communication type setting (DIP SW3)
Set this switch to ON.
(for communication by NT link)
RS-422A
@ Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to ON.
(Set terminator ON.)
Connecting to a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E or CQM1H
PLC Setup Area Settings
Write the PLC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming
Device (e.g. CX-Programmer) in accordance with the host model.
Word #
Writing Value
Setting
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E*1
Host Model
DM6555
4000
Use NT link ((1:1))
Port 2 of CQM1H*2
DM6550
4000
*1 RS-422A port of the communication board
*1 RS-422A port of the Serial Communications Board
For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area, refer to the manual for
the PLC you are using.
Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
Switch 2 : Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
110
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Terminator (TERM):
5-2
Set to ON for termination ON.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side).
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
Set to 4 (right side).
Using the NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected using the RS-422A/485 type NT link
(1:N) method are the CS1G/H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, and CQM1H models only.
A Serial Communications Board or a communications board must be installed to
make the connection.
Check the model and series of the PLC against the type of CPU or communications board before making the connections.
The host units that can be connected to the RS-232C port of the NT31/NT31C by
the RS-422A type NT link (1:N) function via a convertor are indicated in the table
below.
PLC
Series
CPUs with Built-in
RS-422A type
NT Link (1:N) Function
CPU that becomes
connectable by installing a
communication board
Model Name
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS
series
(*1)
---
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/
67-E(V1)(*1)
CS1G
CS1H
---
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE
(-Z)E
---
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG (-Z)E
---
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*2)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*2)
C200HX
(-Z)E
---
CQM1H-CPU51/61(*3)
CQM1H
C series
*1 The serial CS1W-SCB41-E communication board is required.
*1 A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200-COM06-V1 communication board is required.
*1 A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
Settings at the Host
C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E and CQM1H
PLC Setup Area Settings
Write the communication conditions directly into the PLC Setup area (data
memory) using a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer).
Make the setting indicated in the word shown below.
111
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connection to
Word #
Writing Value
Port A of a C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E*1
DM6555
500
Port 2 of a CQM1H*2
DM6550
500
5-2
Setting
Use NT link (1:N)
= highest
g est unit
u t number
u be of
o the
t e
connected PTs ((1 to 7))*3
*1 The Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port
*1 The Serial Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port
*1 When using C200HE(-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.
For details on setting the PLC Setup area settings, refer to the PLC’s operation
manual.
Reference:
There are no Serial Communication Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E in
which port B is the RS-422A/485 port.
There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is
the RS-422A/485 port.
Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E communication board as follows.
Switch 1: Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A), or
Set to 2 (2-wire type, for RS-485)
Switch 2 : Set to ON for terminator ON (termination resistance applied)
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
Wire selection (WIRE): Set to 4 (4-wire type, for RS-422A)
or
Set to 2 (2-wire type, for RS-485)
Terminator (TERM):
Set to ON for termination ON.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side)
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
When using RS-422A: Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.
When using RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.
Connecting to CS-series Serial Communication Board
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS-series
CPU type :
CS1W-SCB41 (The port 2 is RS-422A/485 port.)
112
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Setting the Front Switches
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
Port 1
RS-232C
PORT1
Terminal resistance setting switch (TER)
Set to ON (Terminal resistance is present.) (right side)
OFF
2
Port 2
RS-422A/485
ON TERM
4
WIRE
PORT2
(RS422/
RS485)
Two wire type/four wire type changeover switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A : 4 (4 wire type) (right side)
For RS-485 : 2 (2 wire type) (left side)
SCB41
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU. After settings are written, they become effective by turning the power
ON, restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or executing the
STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are
shown.
Allocation DM
area (CH)
Writing Value
Settings
Port 2
DM32010
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
DM32011
0000 to 0009 (*1)
Communications baud rate (standard)
DM32016
000
= The largest model number of the connected PT (0 – 7)
*1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between
0000 and 0009 Hex.
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 2 in
the NT link (1:N), set a value of 8200 Hex for D32010, 0000 Hex for DM32011,
and 0006 Hex for D32016.
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method
Compatible Host Units
Only OMRON’s CS1H and CS1G PLCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Link
through RS-422A/RS-485. The high-speed 1:N NT Link must be established
through a CS1W-SCB41-E Serial Communications Board. (If a Serial Communications Board is used, even CS-series Units without the “-V1” suffix can be
connected via high-speed 1:N NT Link.)
Be sure to check the model number of the PLC and Board/Unit before trying to
establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
The following table shows which CS-series PLCs can be connected to an
NT31/NT31C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link through RS-422A/RS-485.
113
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
PLCs supporting direct connection to
the CPU Unit
PLCs supporting connection through
a Serial Communication Board
---
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1) (*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1) (*1)
*1 A CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required.
Settings at the Host
Connecting to a CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with an RS-422A/485 port for CS-series CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 2 is an RS-422A/485 port.)
Reference: Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and
Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
Setting the Front Switches
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
Port 1
RS-232C
PORT1
Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side)
OFF
2
ON TERM
4
WIRE
PORT2
(RS422/
RS485)
Port 2
RS-422A/485
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
RS-422A: Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.
RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.
SCB41
CPU Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or CXProgrammer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of the
CPU. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the unit, restarting the communication port, or execution of the STUP
command.
In the following table, the relevant word addresses in the allocation DM area and
settings are shown.
Allocation DM area
Port 2
Writing
Value
Settings
DM32010
8200
NT link (1:N) mode
DM32011
000A
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
DM32016
000
= The largest model number of the
connected PT (0 – 7)
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port 2,
set the value 8200 Hex to DM32010, 000A Hex to DM32011, and 0006 Hex to
DM32016.
When using the Memory
Link Method
114
With the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal computer and an FA computer with RS-422A.
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
When connecting to the host with the memory link method, it is necessary to
create a program for the memory link at the host side.
The following are the communication conditions that can be used with the
memory link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer, etc.),
its setting should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in
the following table. Set the same communication conditions at the NT31/NT31C
by the memory switch. (page 163).
Item
Setting at Host
Input/Output board
RS-422A
Communication speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
Data bits length
7 bits, 8 bits
Stop bits length
1 bit, 2 bits
Parity
None, even, odd
Flow control
None, XON/XOFF
5-2-2 Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of an NT31/NT31C and a
host are connected is described here.
Host link/CPU/
Communication unit
NT31/NT31C
SYSMAC
CS-series PLC,
C-series PLC,
CVM1/CV-series
PLC, SRM1
25-pin
connector
9-pin connector or
25-pin connector
Serial port B
(RS-422A, 25-pin type)
RS-422A cable with connectors (max. length: 500m)
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and Host (RS-422A)
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-422A
Wiring When Connecting a C-series Host Link Unit or CPM1 (Host Link)
Applicable units:
C200H-LK202-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
115
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
1
14
6
1
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
PLC side
−
6
Pin number Abbreviation
SG
7
Connector
hood
FG
−
8
1
RDB
connector
13
25
TRM
9
2
−
RDB (+)
10
3
−
SDB (+)
11
4
−
−
12
5
SDB
−
13
6
RDA
FG
−
14
7
SDA (−)
15
8
−
RDA (−)
16
9
SDA
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
RS-422A
connector
9
5
(9-pin type)
Shielding wire
(25-pin type)
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
Wiring When Connecting CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, or SRM1
Applicable units:
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1A-10CD-
CPM1A-30CD-
CPM2A-30CD-
CPM2A-60CD-
CPM2C-10-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1A-20CD-
CPM1A-40CD-
CPM2A-40CD-
CPM2C-20-
SRM1-C02-V2
Connect to the PLC through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
NT31/NT31C side
1
14
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
FG
−
8
SG
connector
13
25
PLC side
Abbreviation
FG
SG
TRM
9
SDB (+)
RS-422A
terminal
RDB (+)
10
SDA (−)
block
SDB (+)
11
RDB (+)
RDB
−
12
RDA (−)
RDA
−
13
−
14
SDA (−)
15
RDA (−)
16
SDB
SDA
(9-pin type)
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
Shielding wire
(25-pin type)
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
116
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Wiring When Connecting a CS-series CS1G/H Serial Communications
Board, C series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, CQM1H Serial Communications Board, or CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CV500-LK201 (communication port 2)
1
14
6
1
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
PLC side
−
6
Pin number Abbreviation
SG
7
Connector
hood
FG
−
8
1
SDA
TRM
9
2
SDB
RDB (+)
10
3
−
SDB (+)
11
4
−
−
12
5
−
−
13
6
RDA
interface
13
25
−
14
7
−
SDA (−)
15
8
RDB
RDA (−)
16
9
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
Shielding wire
RS-422A
interface
5
9
−
(9-pin type)
(25-pin type)
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
Wiring When Connecting a CVM1/CV-series CPU
Applicable units:
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV
CVM1-CPU21-EV
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV
117
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
CVM1/CV-series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix -EV cannot be connected by any connection method.
1
14
6
1
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
Pin number Abbreviation
SG
7
Connector
hood
FG
−
8
1
SDA
TRM
9
2
SDB
RDB (+)
10
3
−
SDB (+)
11
4
RS
−
12
5
CS
−
13
6
RDA
connector
13
25
PLC (CPU) side
−
14
7
−
SDA (−)
15
8
RDB
RDA (−)
16
−
−
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
9
5
−
9
−
RSB (+)
RS-422A
connector
(9-pin type)
Shielding wire
(25-pin type)
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
Abbreviation
SG
7
Connector
hood
−
8
SDA
TRM
9
SDB
RDB (+)
10
RS
connector
13
25
Host side
SDB (+)
11
CS
−
12
ROA
−
13
ROB
−
14
SDA (−)
15
RDA (−)
16
RS-422A
connector
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
Shielding wire
(25-pin type)
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
118
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
5-2-3 Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of an NT31/NT31C and a host
are connected is described here.
NT31/NT31C
CPU
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1H
25-pin connector
Serial port B
(RS-485, 25-pin type)
9-pin connector
RS-485 cable with connectors (max. length: 500 m)
Reference: When RS-485 is used at the PT side, only the NT link (1:N) method (standard or
high-speed) can be used.
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and Host
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-485
Wiring When Connecting a CS-series CS1G/H Serial Communications
Board and C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board, or
CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
119
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
1
14
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
6
1
NT31/NT31C side
5-2
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
−
8
1
SDA (−)
TRM
9
2
SDB (+)
RDB (+)
10
3
−
SDB (+)
11
4
−
−
12
5
−
−
13
6
RDA (−)
connector
13
25
PLC (CPU) side
Shielding wire
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood
−
14
7
−
SDA (−)
15
8
RDB (+)
RDA (−)
16
9
−
RS-422A
connector
9
5
−
(9-pin type)
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
(25-pin type)
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
5-2-4 1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs
and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.
CPU
NT31/NT31C
Serial port B
(RS-422A, 25-pin
type)
25-pin connector
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
RS-422A cables
(max. total length 500 m)
24V
DC
PRINTER PORT B
120
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1H
9-pin connector
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Reference:
5-2
Communication using the RS-422A type standard NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS-series CS1G/H, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E, or a CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CQM1H.
Communication using the RS-422A type high-speed NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS-series CS1G/H.
The relay terminal block is not included in this figure. Insert the relay terminal
block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below.
Connecting between
NT31/NT31C Units
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-422A
1
14
NT31/NT31C side
Abbreviation Pin number
13
25
FG
Connector
hood
Shielding wire
Connector
hood
1
1
−
SD
2
2
SD
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
RD
3
3
RD
connector
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
−
6
6
−
SG
7
7
SG
8
9
RDB (+)
RDB (+)
13
25
FG
−
−
14
Pin number Abbreviation
RS-232C/
422A/485
TRM
1
NT31/NT31C side
8
−
9
TRM
10
10
RDB (+)
11
11
RDB (+)
−
12
12
−
−
13
13
−
−
14
14
−
SDA (−)
15
15
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
16
16
RDA (−)
−
−
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
23
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
24
24
RSA (−)
−
25
25
−
(25-pin type)
−
(25-pin type)
*2
Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the
end of the RS-422A cable (marked in the figure above) only.
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
Connecting an NT31/NT31C and a Host
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-422A
121
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Wiring When Connecting a CS-series CS1G/H Serial Communication
Board, C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, or CQM1H
Serial Communications Board
Applicable units:
1
14
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
1
NT31/NT31C side
6
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
FG
Connector
hood
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
Connector
hood
FG
−
8
1
SDA (−)
interface
13
25
PLC side
Shielding wire
Pin number Abbreviation
TRM
9
2
SDB (+)
RDB (+)
10
3
−
SDB (+)
11
4
−
−
12
5
−
−
13
6
RDA (−)
−
14
7
−
SDA (−)
15
8
RDB (+)
RDA (−)
16
9
−
5
9
−
(9-pin type)
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
(25-pin type)
RS-422A
interface
Next PT
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
122
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
5-2-5 1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT31/NT31Cs
and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.
CPU
NT31/NT31C
Serial port B
(RS-485, 25-pin type)
25-pin connector
CS1G/H
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1H
9-pin connector
Relay terminal block
Max. 2 m
RS-485 cables
(max. total length 500 m)
24V
DC
PRINTER PORT B
Reference:
Communication using the RS-485 type standard NT link (1:N) method is possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a
CS-series CS1G/H, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E, or a CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a
CQM1H.
Communication using the RS-485 type high-speed NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed
in a CS-series CS1G/H.
123
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
5-2
Connecting between NT31/NT31C Units
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-485
NT31/NT31C side
NT31/NT31C side
1
14
Abbreviation Pin number
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
13
25
FG
Connector
hood
Shielding wire
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
hood
−
1
1
−
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
−
6
6
−
SG
7
7
SG
−
8
8
−
TRM
9
9
TRM
RDB (+)
10
10
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
11
11
SDB (+)
−
12
12
−
−
13
13
−
−
14
14
−
SDA (−)
15
15
SDA (−)
RDA (−)
16
16
RDA (−)
−
−
−
−
RSB (+)
23
23
RSB (+)
RSA (−)
24
24
RSA (−)
−
25
25
−
1
14
13
25
FG
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
−
−
(25-pin type)
(25-pin type)
Next PT
*2
Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the
end of the RS-485 cable (marked in the figure above) only.
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
Connecting an
NT31/NT31C and a Host
The relay terminal block is not included in this figure. Insert the relay terminal
block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below.
NT31/NT31C
Host
RS-485
Wiring When Connecting a CS-series CS1G/H Serial Communication
Board, C Series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communication Board, or CQM1H
Serial Communications Board
Applicable units:
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
124
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
1
14
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
6
1
NT31/NT31C side
5-2
Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
FG
hood
RS-232C/
422A/485
connector
13
25
−
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
−
6
SG
7
Connector
hood
FG
−
8
1
SDA (−)
TRM
9
2
SDB (+)
RDB (+)
10
3
−
SDB (+)
11
4
−
−
12
5
−
−
13
6
RDA (−)
PLC (CPU) side
Shielding wire
Pin number Abbreviation
−
14
7
−
SDA (−)
15
8
RDB (+)
RDA (−)
16
9
−
RS-422A
connector
9
5
−
(9-pin type)
−
−
RSB (+)
23
RSA (−)
24
−
25
(25-pin type)
Next PT
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on
RS-442A/485 Cables on page 127.
5-2-6 Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-422A/485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below. When using the memory link
method, however, use a connector that matches with the RS-422A port at the
CPU (CP) side. Some units come supplied with one connector and connector
hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Model
Maker
Remarks
XM2A-2501
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
Delivered with the following
units:
C500-LK203
DB-25P F-N
25-pin type
Made by JAE
Delivered with the following
units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Connector
125
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Name
Model
XM2S-2511
Connector
hood
DB-C2-J9
Cable
Crimp
terminals
Maker
5-2
Remarks
25-pin type
Made by OMRON
Delivered with the following
units:
C500-LK203
Delivered with the following
units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
25-pin type
Made by JAE
TKVVBS4P-03
Tachii Electric
Wire Co., Ltd.
1.25-N3A
(fork type)
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG
Y1.25-3.5L
(fork type)
Molex Inc.
Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to
t 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm2)
The terminal screws of the RS-422A adaptor (CPM1-CIF11) are M3 specification. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3 use. Tighten terminal screws with
a tightening torque of 0.5 N@m.
Use the same specification of the terminal screws which is used in the relay terminal block.
Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring.
Examples of applicable terminals
Round type
Fork type
6.2 mm or less
6.2 mm or less
5-2-7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT31/NT31C has a terminal resistance setting
terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device at
the end of the communication cable, but not at any other device.
The NT31/NT31C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the terminal
resistance is applied is set by the wiring at the terminal resistance setting terminals (pins No. 9 and 10 of serial port B). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω. When
carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short between
terminals No. 9 and 10 at the NT31/NT31C at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Leave terminals No. 9 and 10 open at NT31/NT31C units other than the one at
the end of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting
is ineffective.
In order to set the terminal resistance, wiring work is required at the cable’s connector: carry out the wiring correctly by referring to APPENDIX E Making the
Cable, page 267.
Abbreviation Pin number
FG
Connector
hood
-
-
TRM
9
RDB (+)
10
SDB (+)
11
-
12
-
126
25
Terminal resistor setting
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Pin Nos. 9 and 10
5-2
Function
Terminal resistance is applied.
Shorted
Short only at the NT31/NT31C connected to the end of an
RS-422A/485 cable.
Terminal resistance is not applied.
Open
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT31/NT31C
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that the
power supply to all of the connected devices (NT31/NT31C, PLC, etc.) is OFF.
Reference:
The internal circuit of the NT31/NT31C is shown below.
+
−
10 (RDB)
16 (RDA)
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and − (RDA).
9 (TRM)
For details on setting the terminal resistance of the host unit, refer to setting
methods for each type of the communication.
5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables
Perform the following procedures to connect, process the shield, and connect to
ground for communications systems using the RS-422A/485. Incorrect connection may result in communications errors with the host.
Connecting the Ground Wire
The PT has a functional ground terminal (FG:
1, 2, 3...
).
1. Ground according to Figure (a) for normal grounding.
• Connect the ground terminal (GR) of the devices to the functional ground (FG:
).
Make sure that each signal line is grounded at only one point and ground to
100 Ω max.
• Short the LG terminal of the PLC to the ground terminal (GR).
• Use a wire gauge of at least 2mm2 for the ground wire.
• Refer to the manual for individual Communications Units for details on proper
wiring procedures.
) of the PT if it is mounted to the
2. Do not ground the functional ground (FG:
same panel as devices that generate noise, such as motors or inverters, as
shown in Figure (b).
Preparing the Shield of RS-422A/485 Connectors
Always prepare RS-422A/485 cable shields properly. Otherwise, communications errors may occur with the host.
Ground only one end of the shield when connecting the ground terminal (GR) of
), and grounding each signal line at
the devices to the functional ground (FG:
only one point and to 100 Ω max, as shown in Figure (a).
Ground both ends of the shield when not grounding the functional ground (FG:
) of the PT, as shown in Figure (b).
When using a CJ1M-CIF11 alone or combined with an NT-AL001, be sure to
connect, process the shield, and connect to ground as shown in Figure (b).
127
Section
Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Example of Recommended Wiring
Signal line
128
Signal line
5-2
SECTION 6
System Menu Operation
This section describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start the PT. Functions that are convenient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also explained here.
6-1
6-2
System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1 Relationships among Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1 Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2 Initializing Display History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-4 Initializing the Recipe Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-6 Initializing the Memory Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-3 Changing the System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-4 Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches . . . . . . . .
6-7-1 About Communication Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-2 Setting the Host Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-3 Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-5 Setting the Memory Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-1 Memory Switch Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-2 Setting the Start-up Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-3 Setting the Key Press Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-4 Setting the Buzzer Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-5 Setting the Printer Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-6 Setting the Print Method (NT31C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-9 Setting the History Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
131
132
132
133
133
135
136
138
138
140
142
143
145
147
148
149
149
151
152
153
155
155
158
160
161
163
165
166
166
166
167
168
169
170
172
173
175
177
179
181
183
184
186
129
Section
6-11 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-1 I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-6 Checking Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-7 Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-8 Checking Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-1 Usable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12-3 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 Device Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-1 Compatible Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13-3 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14 Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14-1 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
189
189
193
195
196
198
200
203
213
219
219
221
222
225
226
226
227
228
228
System Menu Operation Flow
6-1
Section
6-1
System Menu Operation Flow
Follow the procedure below when using the NT31/NT31C for the first time or
changing the system program.
Create the Screen Data
Create the data to be displayed on the NT31/NT31C by using the Support Tool.
For details on creating screen data, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1
for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-).
Start Up the NT31/NT31C
(Display the System
Menu) (page 132)
Turn ON the power to the NT31/NT31C.
If no screen data has been registered, an error message is displayed. In this
case, press the OK touch switch on the error message screen to display the System Menu.
If screen data has been registered and the RUN mode is established, perform
the appropriate operations on the touch panel to display the System Menu.
Initialize the Memory
(page 138)
If necessary, initialize the memory of the NT31/NT31C by operation from the
System Menu.
Transmit the Screen Data
(page 153)
Connect the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C and transmit the screen data from
the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C.
For details on connecting the Support Tool, refer to 3-2 Connecting to the Support Tool (page 33).
Set the Memory Switches
(pages 155, 166, 186)
Select the System Menu and set the operations of the NT31/NT31C — for example the conditions for communication with the host — using the memory
switches.
Start Operation (page
166)
Connect the NT31/NT31C to the host and start operation.
System Maintenance
(page 189)
If an error occurs during operation, check the I/Os, settings, etc., by referring to
this guide.
131
Section
Starting the NT31/NT31C
6-2
6-2
Starting the NT31/NT31C
After checking that the hardware has been connected correctly, switch on the
power to the NT31/NT31C to start it up.
This section describes the operation of the NT31/NT31C when it is started up.
6-2-1 Operation at Startup
The NT31/NT31C operates as follows when the power is switched ON, or when
it is reset.
Initial Processing
Self diagnosis — including a check on the internal memory of the NT31/NT31C
and a system program check — and the internal processing required for startup,
are performed.
If an error occurs during initial processing, an error screen is displayed.
If there is an error in the system program, the system program must be reinstalled. For details on the installation procedure, refer to 6-5 Operations in the
System Installer Mode (page 148).
Memory Unit Check and
Processing
Check if a memory unit is installed. If a memory unit is installed, processing
(screen data and system program reading/writing) is executed in accordance
with its DIP switch settings (pages 37 and 45).
If there is an error in the screen data, an error screen is displayed. Pressing the
OK touch switch on the error screen will return the display to that immediately
before the error occurred. It is also possible to display the System Menu from the
error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously. If there is an error in the system program, the main menu of the system installer mode is displayed. If this is the case, reinstall the proper system program.
Initialize the memory or change the settings as required.
Start of Communication
with the Host
Communication with the host starts in accordance with the communication
method set in the system memory of the NT31/NT31C. During the interval until
communication is established, the system initialization screen (screen No.
9000) is displayed.
For details, refer to 6-8 Starting Operation (page 166).
If the system initialization screen remains on, display the System Menu by
pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously, and check
the settings for the communication conditions for communication with the host.
Operation Start
The RUN mode is established, and operation starts in accordance with the
screen data in the NT31/NT31C.
When changing the settings or checking the statuses, perform the appropriate
operation by displaying the System Menu. For details on displaying the System
Menu, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu (page 136).
132
Section
Operation Modes and the System Menu
6-3
6-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
The NT31/NT31C operates in four modes: the RUN, Transmit, Maintenance,
and Expansion modes. These modes are selected from the System Menu.
In addition, the NT31/NT31C also features the System Installer mode which is
used specifically for installing the system program.
The System Installer mode is selected by operation at the panel when the
NT31/NT31C power is switched ON.
6-3-1 Relationships among Modes
The relationships among the System Menu, each of the operation modes, and
the System Installer mode, are indicated in the figure below.
For details on system menu operation, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System
Menu (page 136).
[RUN Mode]
[Transmit Mode]
This is the mode in which
the NT31/NT31C operates.
In this mode the
NT31/NT31C can be
controlled from the host,
and various display and
I/O operations are
possible.
In this mode, screen
data and other data are
transmitted between the
Support Tool and the
NT31/NT31C.
To change system
settings or screen
data contents
When system
settings and screen
data registration have
been completed
To change system
settings or screen
data contents.
SYSTEM MENU
[Maintenance Mode]
In this mode,
NT31/NT31C
maintenance operations,
such as initialization of
the memory, checking
settings, and the I/O
check, are executed.
Quit
Power ON
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
If there is no system
program, or if the
settings for data
control are changed...
[System Installer Mode]
[Expansion Mode]
In this mode, the
Programming Console
function is used, or check
the version of system
program.
In this mode, the system program of the
NT31/NT31C is installed, display of the
System Menu is enabled or disabled, and
screen data changes are enabled and
disabled, among other operations.
133
Section
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Items in the System
Menu
6-3
The items displayed in the system menu and their functions are as follows.
Menu Item
Function
Quit
Clear the System Menu screen and return to the RUN mode
screen.
Transmit Mode
Display the Transmit Mode screen to allow transmission for
screen data between the Support Tool and the NT31/NT31C.
For details on transmission of screen data, refer to 6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data (page 153).
Maintenance Mode Display the Maintenance Mode menu to allow system maintenance of the NT31/NT31C, and various NT31/NT31C settings.
Expansion Mode
Functions of the System
Installer Mode
134
Display the Expansion Mode menu to allow selection of the
expansion functions supported by the NT31/NT31C. The following expansion functions are supported:
• Version Display
Displays the version of system program, the date it was
created, and the PT model. For details, refer to 6-14 Version
Display.
• Programming Console Function
Allows the NT31/NT31C to be used as a Programming Console
for a CS1G/CS1H, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), or SRM1.
For details, refer to 6-12 Programming Console Function.
• Device Monitor Function
Allows the NT31/NT31C to change the PLC’s operating mode
and display/change the contents of words in a CS1G/CS1H,
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z), or SRM1. For details, refer to 6-13 Device Monitor
Function in this manual or 2-16 Device Monitor Function in the
Reference Manual.
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode.
• Setting the display language
• Clearing and installing system programs
• Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu.
• Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory
• Clearing screen data
For details on these functions, refer to 6-5 Operations in the System Installer
Mode (page 148).
Section
Operation Modes and the System Menu
6-3
6-3-2 Menu Tree
The System Menu allows the various functions of the NT31/NT31C to be
executed by using touch switches displayed on the touch panel. The menu tree,
starting from the System Menu, is shown below.
For details on System Menu operations, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu (page 136).
The menu tree may differ according to the system program installed in the
NT31/NT31C. The menu tree for the system program that is installed in the
NT31/NT31C on shipment is shown below.
SYSTEM INSTALLER MODE
Exit System Installer
Download System Program (page 149)
Change System Settings (page 151)
Erase Screen Data (page 152)
SYSTEM MENU
MEMORY INIT. MENU
Quit
Transmit Mode (page 153)
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
Quit
Screen Data (page 138)
Display History (page 140)
Alarm History (page 142)
Recipe Table (page 143)
Memory Table (page 145)
Memory Switch (page 147)
MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU
Quit
Memory Init.
Memory Switch
I/O Settings
Calendar Check (page 193)
PT Settings (page 195)
Display History
Alarm History
Screen Data Disp. (page 200)
I/O Check
MEMORY
SWITCH MENU
Start-up Wait Time (page 167)
Key Press Sound (page 168)
Buzzer Sound (page 169)
Printer Controller (page 170)
Print Method (page 172)
Screen Saver Movement (page 173)
Screen Saver Start up Time (page 175)
Hist. Disp. Method (page 177)
Resume Function (page 179)
Comm. Auto-return (page 181)
Time-out Interval (page 183)
Retry Counts (page 184)
Comm. A Method (page 155)
Comm. B Select (page 165)
Comm. B Method (page 155)
I/O SETTINGS MENU
I/O CHECK MENU
Quit
Contrast Adjust (page 189)
Brightness Adjust (page 191)
Quit
I/F Check
Device Check
DISPLAY HISTORY MENU
EXPANSION
MODE MENU
Quit
Programming Console Function (page 219)
Version Display (page 228)
Device Monitor Function (page 225)
I/F CHECK MENU
Quit
Tool Comm. (page 213)
Comm. Port A (page 215)
Comm. Port B (page 215)
Printer (page 218)
DEVICE CHECK MENU
Quit
Sort by Occurrence (page 196)
Sort by Frequency (page 196)
ALARM HISTORY MENU
Quit
Sort by Occurrence (page 198)
Sort by Frequency (page 198)
Quit
Buzzer Check (page 203)
LED Check (page 204)
LCD Check (page 206)
Backlight Check (page 207)
Screen Memory (page 207)
Touch Switch (page 210)
Battery (page 212)
135
Section
Operation Modes and the System Menu
6-3
6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu
This section describes how to use the menus, including how to call the System
Menu, how to call the System Installer mode, and how to select menu items.
Calling the System Menu
The System Menu can be displayed by either of the following two methods.
• Touching the corners of the touch panel
• Pressing a touch switch that displays the System Menu
Reference:
If display of the System Menu is disabled by the setting made in the System
Installer mode, the System Menu cannot be displayed (this does not apply if an
error has occurred).
At the same as the System Menu is displayed, the operation of the
NT31/NT31C stops and the RUN LED goes OFF.
Touching The Corners of The Touch Panel
When two of the four corners of the touch panel (see the figure below) are
touched simultaneously, the System Menu is displayed.
RUN mode
POWER
[SYSTEM MENU]
RUN
Quit
Press any two of the four
corners at the same time.
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode
Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed at
corners on the screen. If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first, the
touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed. In particular, when the touch switch has switch screen function, as a result of screen
switch over, it means the corner is not pressed even if it is kept pressing. To successfully call the System Menu, first press a corner where no touch switch is displayed, and then press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch
switch.
Reference: With the NT31/NT31C, the System Menu can be displayed even if the screen has
touch switches registered at all four corners.
Pressing a Touch Switch That Displays The System Menu
There is a control key that has the function of displaying the System Menu.
By registering the touch switch for System Menu display ([MENU]) on a screen
when creating it, the System Menu can be displayed just by pressing this switch.
Calling the System
Installer Mode
If the NT31/NT31C has no system program installed, or if the system program is
destroyed, the System Installer mode is automatically established when the
power is switched ON.
To establish the System Installer mode in order to install a system program or
make settings for data management, either turn the power ON, or reset the
136
Section
Operation Modes and the System Menu
6-3
NT31/NT31C, while pressing the touch switch at the top left corner of the touch
panel (size: 7.2 mm
7.2 mm).
Switch the power to the NT31/NT31C ON while pressing this touch switch.
POWER
RUN
Selecting Menu Items
The menu items in the System Menu are displayed on the NT31/NT31C screen
as touch switches. Menu items can be selected simply by pressing them.
Example: Displaying the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen by pressing
Maintenance Mode in the System Menu.
Ver 3.10
Switching from the
System Menu to the RUN
Mode
Press Maintenance Mode.
Return to the RUN mode by selecting Quit in the System Menu and other menus.
Reference: Unlike previous PT models, the NT31/NT31C does not return to the RUN mode
automatically if no operations are performed.
137
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
6-4
Memory Initialization
The NT31/NT31C has the following initialization functions. Use them as necessary.
• Clearing screen data
Page 138
• Initializing memory tables
Page 145
• Initializing memory switches
Page 147
• Initializing display history record data
Page 140
• Initializing alarm history record data
Page 142
• Initializing recipe tables
Page 143
Reference: If writing to the screen data memory has been disabled by the System Setting
setting in the System Installer mode, memory initialization is not possible.
6-4-1 Clearing Screen Data
Use this function if the screen data has been corrupted and the NT31/NT31C
cannot be started up correctly.
This operation clears (initializes) only the screen data and contents of the mathematical tables. The memory switch settings and display history/alarm history
record data are retained.
Reference:
When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the
NT31/NT31C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens are
backed up at the Support Tool before using it.
The screen data can be cleared in the System Installer mode too (page 149).
The following types of data can be initialized individually.
Contents of numeral/character string memory tables (page 142)
Memory switch settings (page 145)
Display history record data (page 140)
Alarm history record data (page 142)
138
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Screen Data.
Select Yes.
The screen data is cleared. During clearance, the message Erasing Now... is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without clearing the screen data.
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT31/NT31C returns to the
MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT31/NT31C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the
RUN mode will not be established.
139
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
6-4-2 Initializing Display History Record Data
The display history record function keeps a record of the order of display of the
screens displayed during operation, and the number of times each screen is displayed. These records are kept only for screens for which the History attribute
has been set.
The maximum number of records is 1024 for sort by occurrence (order of display
occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times each
screen has been displayed).
Use the display history record initialization function to clear the history record
data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if
Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting of System in PT Configuration
(Tools) has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the maximum
number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be periodically
initialized. If Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) is checked, when the maximum number of
records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded.
Reference: The NT31/NT31C also allows the display history record data to be initialized by
controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to 2-2-1 PT
Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.
140
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Initialize the display history record data by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Display History.
Select Yes.
The display history record data is initialized.
During initialization, the message Initializing
is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the display history record data.
On completion of display history record data initialization, the message Finished
is displayed and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
141
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
6-4-3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data
The alarm history record function continually checks the status of host bits that
have been designated in advance with a bit memory table, and records the time
when any of the bits is set to 1 (comes ON), and the number of times that each bit
comes ON.
The maximum number of records is 256 for sort by occurrence (order of error
occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times each
error has occurred).
Use the alarm history record initialization function to reset the alarm history record data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if
Screen (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting in the PT Environment Settings –
System Settings has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the
maximum number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be
periodically initialized. If Screen (Use Ring Buffer) is checked, when the maximum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest
data is recorded.
Reference: The NT31/NT31C also allows the alarm history record data to be initialized by
controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to 2-2-1 PT
Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.
142
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Initialize the alarm history record data by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Alarm History.
Select Yes.
The alarm history record data is initialized.
During initialization, the message Initializing
is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the alarm history record data.
On completion of alarm history record data initialization, the message Finished
is displayed and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
6-4-4 Initializing the Recipe Tables
You can initialize the recipe tables (i.e., all the recipe data) edited in the
NT31/NT31C. Here, “initializing” the recipe tables means to restore the battery
backup memory (“recipe data memory”) to the values in flash memory at that
time. If, after downloading from the Support Tool, you do not upload the data
even once, initialization will restore the initial values set using the Support Tool.
The values will not be cleared.
143
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Initialize the recipe tables by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Recipe Table.
Select Yes.
The recipe tables are initialized. During initialization, the message Initializing is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the recipe tables.
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed
and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
144
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables
It is possible to initialize the numeral memory tables and character string
memory tables in the NT31/NT31C.
When these tables are initialized, the values are returned to those set by the
Support Tool (they are not cleared).
When the memory tables are initialized, they are returned to their initial values
regardless of the setting made for the resume function (page 179).
If ON is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the initial values set with
the Support Tool will not be recorded in the memory tables unless they are initialized.
Reference:
If OFF is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the memory tables can
be initialized just by switching the NT31/NT31C power off and back on again,
or by resetting the NT31/NT31C (page 179).
The bit memory table merely reflects the statuses of bits at the host and therefore cannot be initialized.
145
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
Initialize the memory tables by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Memory Table.
Select Yes.
The memory tables are initialized. During initialization, the message Initializing is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the memory tables.
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed
and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
146
Section
Memory Initialization
6-4
6-4-6 Initializing the Memory Switches
Initialization returns all the memory switches of the NT31/NT31C to their status
on shipment.
Initialize the memory switches by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Init..
Select Memory Switch.
Select Yes.
The memory tables are initialized. During initialization, the message Initializing is displayed.
If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen
without initializing the memory switches.
On completion of memory switch initialization, the message Finished is displayed and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
147
Section
Operations in the System Installer Mode
6-5
After initialization, the memory switch statuses are as follows.
Memory Switch
Status
Start-up Wait Time
00
Key Press Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Printer Controller
ESC/P
Print Method
Tone (NT31C only)
Screen Saver Movement
Display erased
Screen Saver Start up Time
010
Hist. Disp. Method
From New Data
Resume Function
OFF
Comm. Auto-return
OFF
Time-out Interval
01
Retry Counts
005
Comm. A Method
Host Link (communications speed = 9600 bps)*
Comm. B Select
RS-232C
Comm. B Method
None
* The communication conditions for a bar code reader are initialized as follows:
Data bits: 7 bits; stop bit: 1 bit; parity: none; flow control: RS/CS.
6-5
Operations in the System Installer Mode
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode:
• Setting the display language (see below)
• Clearing/installing the system program (page 149)
• Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu (changing the system settings)
(page 151)
• Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory (changing the system
settings) (page 151)
• Clearing screen data (page 152)
For details on calling the System Installer mode, refer to Calling the System Installer Mode (page 136).
The version code displayed beside the System Installer title on the screen indicates the version of the System Installer Mode. For version 2.00 or later, the
memory unit is used to transfer the system program. For details, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit (-V Versions) on page 37.
148
Section
Operations in the System Installer Mode
6-5
6-5-1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode
The first setting made in the System Installer mode is to select whether the display language is to be English or Japanese.
Select English or Japanese.
From here on, this manual assumes that
English has been selected here.
The System Installer mode menu is displayed.
If there is no system program or the system
program has been corrupted, the message
System Program not exist or incorrect. is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program
Use this function when the system program of the NT31/NT31C has been corrupted, or when installing a new system program.
Reference:
In order to install a system program, the system installer must also be installed
at the Support Tool. The system installer is an accessory with the Support Tool
(NT-ZJCAT1-EV4). When installing the Support Tool in a personal computer,
install the system installer also. For details on the method for installing the system installer at the Support Tool side, and the operating procedure, refer to the
NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1 for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-).
When the system program is cleared by mistake, it becomes impossible to use
the NT31/NT31C at all. Check that the system installer is installed at the Support Tool side before deleting the program. However, note that the registered
screen data and memory switch settings are retained.
It becomes possible to install the system program inside the memory unit automatically by installing the memory unit at startup. (Refer to 3-5 Using a Memory
Unit (-V Versions).)
Clear/install the system program by following the menu operation from the System Installer mode menu shown below.
149
Section
Operations in the System Installer Mode
6-5
Clearing the System Program
Select Download System Program.
Select Yes.
The system program is cleared. During
clearance, the message Erasing ... is displayed.
• If Return to Menu is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the System Installer
mode menu without clearing the system program.
• If clearance fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is displayed.
On completion of system program clearance, the NT31/NT31C enters the
standby status for downloading of the system program.
Downloading the System
Program
On normal completion of system program clearance, the standby status for system program downloading is automatically established.
When the NT31/NT31C enters this status,
transmit the system program from the system installer at the personal computer.
During downloading, the progress of transmission is indicated on the screen.
Select Run System.
If Abort is selected during standby for downloading or during downloading, a
screen asking whether you wish to download again is displayed.
When the system program is started, the NT31/NT31C starts up normally. If no
screen data has been registered, an error message will be displayed indicating
that screen data hasn’t been registered. Transfer the screen data and proceed.
Reference: If the new system program is not downloaded successfully after deleting a system program, it is not possible to use the NT31/NT31C at all. After deleting the
system program, be sure to download a new one.
150
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Section
6-5
6-5-3 Changing the System Settings
The NT31/NT31C allows the following settings to be made to prevent the screen
data and memory switch settings from being changed or deleted by operating
errors.
Disabling/enabling System Menu Display
When System Menu display is disabled by this setting, the System Menu cannot
be displayed by touch panel operations or by using the touch switches. However, if a error occurs, the System Menu can be displayed from the error message
screen.
Disabling/enabling Writing to The Screen Data Memory
When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by this setting, it is impossible to use the following System Menu functions.
• Switching to the Transmit mode
• Displaying the memory switch setting screens
• Checking the screen data memory
• Displaying the initialization menu
• Displaying the calendar/time setting screen (the calendar/time display screen
can be displayed)
Change the system settings by following the menu operation from the System
Installer mode menu shown below.
Select Change System Settings.
Select Display System Menu or Screen
Memory Protect.
Each time either of these items is selected,
the setting switches from Disabled to Enabled or vice versa.
Select OK.
The settings are written to the NT31/NT31C
while the screen is displayed.
• If Cancel is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the System Installer mode
menu without changing the settings. The settings remain as they were before
the operation was started.
151
Operations in the System Installer Mode
Section
6-5
• If writing of the settings fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is
displayed.
After the settings have been written, the System Installer mode menu screen is
redisplayed.
6-5-4 Clearing Screen Data
If the screen data has been corrupted and the NT31/NT31C cannot be started
normally, use this function to clear the screen data.
Note that only the screen data is cleared (initialized), and the memory switch settings and the display history/alarm history record data are retained.
Reference:
When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in the
NT31/NT31C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created screens are
backed up at the Support Tool before using it.
The screen data can also be cleared from the System Menu (page 138).
If the screen data is cleared in the System Installer mode, the message Screen
Data Corrupted may be displayed on switching to the RUN mode. If this happens, initialize the screen data again from the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Installer
mode menu shown below.
Select Erase Screen Data.
Select Yes.
The screen data is cleared. During clearance, the message Erasing ... is displayed.
• If Return to Menu is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT.
MENU screen without clearing the screen data.
• If screen data clearance fails, a screen asking if you wish to try again is displayed.
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT31/NT31C returns to the System Installer mode menu screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT31/NT31C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from
the Support Tool or memory unit, an error message will be displayed and the
RUN mode will not be established.
152
Section
Transmitting the Screen Data
6-6
6-6
Transmitting the Screen Data
The screen data is created with the Support Tool and then transmitted to the
NT31/NT31C. This section explains how to transmit the screen data.
For details on how to create the screen data and the operation of the Support
Tool, refer to the Reference Manual and the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.1 for
Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-).
Reference:
The screen data can be transmitted also from the memory unit installed in the
NT31/NT31C. For details on this method, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit
(-V Versions) or 3-6 Using a Memory Unit (Versions without the V Suffix).
The screen data can be transmitted at a faster rate by setting High for Baud
Rate on the Comms. Setting... window of the Support Tool.
If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for System
Setting in the System Installer mode, screen data transmission is not possible.
Screen Data Composition
and Transmission Units
The screen data comprises the following types of data.
• User screen data (screen units)
• System memory (memory switch) settings
• Direct connection information
• Numeral memory table data
• Character string memory table data
• Bit memory table data
• Mathematical table data
• Mark information
• Image/library data
• Recipe table data
It is possible to transmit the screen data (data for all the screens) in file units, or to
transmit individual data or the data of individual screens in data units. (It is not
possible to transmit mathematical table data in data units.)
When data is transmitted in file units, all of the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is
cleared and then the new data is transmitted.
When data is transmitted in data units, first the previous data is invalidated, then
the new data is registered as valid data. Since the previous data is not cleared,
free memory area in the NT31/NT31C will be insufficient when transmissions in
data units are repeated. If this happens, write the screen data again by data
transmission in file units.
Transmitting Screen Data
from the Support Tool
To transmit screen data from the Support Tool to the NT31/NT31C, follow the
procedure below.
Operation
1, 2, 3...
1. Connect the NT31/NT31C to a personal computer in which the Support Tool
has been installed and turn the power to the NT31/NT31C ON.
2. Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the Support Tool.
153
Section
Transmitting the Screen Data
6-6
3. Establish the Transmit mode by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below at the NT31/NT31C.
Ver 3.10
Select Transmit Mode.
Select Tool Transmit.
4. Open the screen data to be transmitted at the Support Tool, then select
Download (NTST PT) in the Support Tool’s Connect menu and specify the
data to be transmitted.
5. During screen data transmission, the transmission status is displayed.
6. On completion of screen data transmission, press the Quit touch switch.
The NT31/NT31C returns to the Transmit mode.
If the screen data cannot be successfully transmitted from the Support Tool, use
the communication check functions of the NT31/NT31C to check if communication between the NT31/NT31C is normal or not (page 213).
Precautions to Be
Observed When
Transmitting Screen Data
154
If any of the following, or a system error, occurs during transmission of screen
data, the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly in the
NT31/NT31C. If this happens, the NT31/NT31C may not enter the RUN mode
when started up, or there may be unpredictable malfunctions such as failure to
display screens during operation. In this case, the screen data must be retransmitted in file units to register it correctly.
• The power to the NT31/NT31C is interrupted or the NT31/NT31C is reset.
• The power to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running is
interrupted or the computer is reset.
• The cable connecting the NT31/NT31C to the personal computer on which the
Support Tool is running is disconnected or has a broken wire.
• The Quit touch switch on the NT31/NT31C screen is pressed to end screen
data transmission.
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
• Screen data transmission is stopped by operation at the Support Tool.
Note When transferring the data in units of screens, if there are changes in memory
table and/or direct access, transfer such data along with the screen data.
6-7
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by
Using Memory Switches
The NT31/NT31C can be connected to the host by the following 7 types of communication methods can be used to communicate with a host.
• Host link
Memory link method
• NT Link (1:1)
Mitsubishi A-computer link method
• NT Link (1:N)
Mitsubishi FX method
• High-speed NT Link (1:N)
The NT31/NT31C has the following two ports, either of which can be used for
communications with the host, depending on the requirements.
• Serial port A (exclusively for RS-232C, 9-pin connector)
• Serial port B (RS-232C/RS-422A (selectable), 25-pin connector)
The method for setting the communication method for communications with the
host is described here.
For details on setting the communication conditions for a bar code reader, refer
to 6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function (page 186).
Reference:
Apart from the host, it is also possible to connect the Support Tool or a bar code
reader to serial port A. When a bar code reader is connected at serial port A,
the host must be connected at serial port B. When serial port A is being used
for communications with the host, the host must be disconnected so that the
Support Tool can be connected.
There are four memory switch setting screens. The conditions for communications with the host are set on the fourth screen (the screen on which 4/4 is displayed). For details on setting memory switches other than those for setting the
conditions for communications with the host, refer to 6-9 System Settings
(page 166).
When using the Mitsubishi A-computer link method and Mitsubishi FX method,
a system program for multi-venders is required. Install the system program to
the NT31/31C by the system installer (refer to page 149). For details, refer to
PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-).
When using PLCs manufactured by Allen-Bradley, GE Fanuc, or Siemens, refer to NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-).
6-7-1 About Communication Conditions
Items Set for
Communication
Conditions
The following settings are made for the communication conditions for communication between the NT31/NT31C and the host.
155
Section
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
6-7
Port Communication Method/Communication Type Settings
Setting Item
Comm. A Method
Function
Setting Options
Page
Set the communication method used at serial
port A. Depending on the communication method, further communication condition settings
may be necessary.
A system program for OMRON
model.
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N) (standard or highspeed)/Bar-Code Reader
Memory link
Page 158
Page 160
Page 161
Page 163
Comm. B Select
Set whether serial port B is to be used for
RS-232C or RS-422A communication.
RS-232C/RS-422A
Page 165
Comm. B Method
Set the communication method used at serial
port B. Depending on the communication method, further communication condition settings
may be necessary.
A system program for OMRON
model.
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N) (standard or highspeed)
Memory link
Page 158
Page 160
Page 161
Page 163
Communication Condition Settings for The Host Link Method
Setting Item
Comm. Speed
(for host link only)
Function
Setting Options
Sets the communications speed
9600 bps/
for communications with the host. 19200 bps
Page
Page
158
Communication Condition Settings for The NT link (1:1) Method
No further communication conditions need to be set.
Communication Conditions Settings for The NT Link (1:N) Method
Setting Item
Function
Setting Options
Unit No.
(for NT link (1:N)
only)
Set the unit number of the
NT31/NT31C.
0 to 7
Comm. Speed
Sets the communications speed
Standard or
for communications with the host. high-speed
Page
Page
161
Setting The Conditions for Communications with The Memory Link Method
Setting Item
Possible Combinations
of Communication
Method Settings
156
Function
Setting Options
Data bits
Set the data bits length.
7, 8 bits
Stop bits
Set the stop bits length.
1, 2 bits
Parity
Set the parity.
None, even,
odd
Comm. Speed
Set the communications speed
1200, 2400,
for communications with the host. 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
bps
Flow control
Set the flow control and its method.
None, RS/CS,
XON/XOFF
Response
Set whether the response is carried out for normal process of
communication command or not.
Yes, No
Page
Page
g
163
The combinations of communication methods that can be set with the
NT31/NT31C are indicated in the table below. Combinations other than these
listed below cannot be set (when using a system for multi-venders, refer to the
PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection
Manual (V060-E1-).
Section
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
6-7
Serial port A
Serial port B
None
Host Link
NT Link
(1:1)
NT Link
(1:N)
Bar-code
reader
Memory
Link
None
Host Link
NT Link (1:1)
NT Link (1:N)
(Standard or
high-speed)
Memory Link
: Possible combination
: Impossible combination
Combinations other than those indicated above cannot be set.
Reference: When using serial port B for communication with the host, and serial port A for the
transmission of screen data from the Support Tool, set the settings of serial port A
to None.
157
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
6-7-2 Setting the Host Link Method
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the host link method is to be set
(Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to
display the setting option Host Link.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
158
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Comm. Speed touch switch to display the communications speed to be set.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press Quit.
The communications speed is set.
• To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the communications speed, press the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C returns to the
memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications speed
remains in effect.
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT31/NT31C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
159
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
6-7-3 Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method
Set the communication conditions for the NT link (1:1) method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT link (1:1) method is to be
set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to
display the setting option NT Link (1:1).
The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
160
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed)
Set the communication conditions for the NT link (1:N) method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
The communications speed determines whether the 1:N NT Link is standard or
high-speed.
Standard:
High-speed:
Standard 1:N NT Link
High-speed 1:N NT Link
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT link (1:N) method (standard or high-speed) is to be set (Comm. A
Method or Comm. B Method) to display the
setting option NT Link (1:N).
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
161
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Unit No. touch switch to display
the unit number to be set. Press the Comm.
Speed touch switch to display the communications speed, standard or 115.2-kbps
high-speed. (The Comm. Speed setting determines which method of 1:N NT Link is
used.)
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed. In this example, serial port A is used for a standard 1:N NT Link.
Press Quit.
The unit number and communications
speed are set.
• To quit the unit number/communications speed setting screen without confirming the unit number/communications speed settings, press the Abort touch
switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the memory switch setting screen (4/4)
with the previous settings still in effect.
Reference: Unit numbers are numbers assigned to each PT when multiple PTs are connected to one host, so that the host can identify the individual PTs. The units numbers that can be set differ according to the host model, as follows.
C200HE(-ZE):
Unit numbers 0 to 3 (maximum of 4 PTs per host port)
C200HG(-ZE), C200HX(-ZE):
Unit numbers 0 to 7 (maximum of 8 PTs per host port)
When making the settings, make sure there is no duplication of unit numbers
among PTs.
On completion of unit number/communications speed setting a, the
NT31/NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
162
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
6-7-5 Setting the Memory Link Method
Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below. Check
the communication settings of the host to be used.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the memory link method is to be
set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to
display the setting option Memory Link.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.
163
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
Display the data bits to be set (7 bits or 8 bits)
by pressing the Data Bit Length touch switch.
Display the stop bits to be set (1 bit or 2 bits)
by pressing the Stop Bit Length touch switch.
Display the parity to be set (None, even, odd)
by pressing the Parity Bit touch switch.
Display the communication speed to be set
(1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.)
by pressing the Comm. Speed touch switch.
Display the condition of the flow control to be
set (None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF) by pressing
Flow Control touch switch.
If the RS-422A is selected for serial port B setting, RS/CS is not displayed.
Display presence or absence of the response
by pressing the Response touch switch.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Quit touch switch.
• To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the communications speed, press the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C returns to the
memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications speed
remains in effect.
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT31/NT31C returns to
the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
164
Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Section
6-7
6-7-6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B
Set the communication type (RS-232C or RS-422A) for serial port B by following
the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Display the fourth memory switch screen by
pressing the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.
Press the Comm. B Select touch switch to
display the communication type to be set.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Reference: f serial port B is used for RS-485 communications, RS-422A must be set as its
communication type.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
165
Section
System Settings
6-8
6-9
Starting Operation
After completing screen data transmission and setting the communication
conditions, connect the NT31/NT31C to the host and start operation.
Note Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before using
them. If incorrect, the system may operate unpredictably.
Switching to the RUN
Mode and Starting
Operation
Press the Quit touch switch on the System Menu screen or other screen. The
NT31/NT31C switches to the RUN mode and starts operation.
The operation at the start is as follows.
Display of The System Initialization Screen
When establishing the communication with a host, the System initializing character string is displayed on the screen. If the communication with the host cannot
be established, the System initializing screen remains up. If this is the case,
check the settings at the host and the PT side, the cables and wiring.
In addition, creating screen number 9000 enables the display of a screen other
than the System initialization screen.
Transmission of The Contents of Memory Tables
If the Resume Function memory switch is set to ON, or if the initial values of the
memory tables are used, the contents of the numeral/character-string memory
tables are copied to the allocated words at the host.
↓
Display of The Startup Screen
The startup screen is displayed on reading the contents (screen number of the
screen to be displayed) of the first word of the PT status control area.
If the contents are not correct for a screen number, or there is no data registered
for the set screen number, an error message is displayed.
Confirming the
Communications
between the NT31/NT31C
and the Host
Execute the host program and confirm that the following operations are performed normally.
• Confirm that the NT31/NT31C screens switch in accordance with the host program.
If the screens do not switch correctly, check the connection between the
host and the NT31/NT31C, and also check if the hardware settings are correct. For details, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C
Port, or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
• Confirm that the operation results of touch switch and numeric value/character
string input at the NT31/NT31C are sent to the host correctly by displaying the
contents of the host words and bits using a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer).
If the results of operations at the NT31/NT31C are not sent to the host correctly, check the setting of the display elements. For details on setting display elements, refer to the description of each display element in the Reference Manual.
6-9
System Settings
The NT31/NT31C allows a variety of functions which are convenient during operation to be set with memory switches. This section describes the memory
switch settings relating to the operation environment.
Since the memory switch settings are backed up to the flash memory by the battery in the NT31/NT31C, they are not cleared when the power is switched OFF.
6-9-1 Memory Switch Setting Screens
There are four memory switch setting screens. The required screen can be displayed by using the [ ] (next screen) and [ ] (previous screen) touch switches.
166
Section
System Settings
6-9
The four memory switch setting screens are shown below.
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
Memory Switch Settings
A list of the memory switch settings is presented below.
• Start-up Wait Time
page 167
• Key Press Sound
page 168
• Buzzer Sound
page 169
• Printer Controller
page 170
• Print Method
page 172
• Screen Saver Movement
page 173
• Screen Saver Start up Time
page 175
• Hist. Disp. Method
page 177
• Resume Function
page 179
• Comm. Auto-return
page 181
• Time-out Interval
page 183
• Retry Counts
page 184
• Comm. A Method
page 155
(For the bar code reader, refer to page 186.)
• Comm. B Select
page 165
• Comm. B Method
page 155
For details on each setting, refer to the pages indicated.
6-9-2 Setting the Start-up Wait Time
The Start-up Wait Time is the time lapse until the NT31/NT31C switches to the
RUN mode after its power has been switched ON or after it has been reset. Set
this item if it takes some time for the host to start operation. Nothing is displayed
during the Start-up Wait Time.
The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 00sec.
167
Section
System Settings
6-9
Set the system start-up wait time by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Start-up Wait Time to display the required time lapse.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed, according to the following sequence.
01 02 03 .... 09 10 00 01 ....
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-3 Setting the Key Press Sound
It is possible to set whether or not the key sound is sounded when a touch switch
on the NT31/NT31C screen is pressed.
• ON:
When a touch switch is pressed, the key sound sounds for 0.2 seconds.
• OFF: The key sound does not sound when touch switches are pressed.
The default (factory) setting is ON.
168
Section
System Settings
6-9
Set the key press sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Key Press Sound to display ON or
OFF.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-4 Setting the Buzzer Sound
The NT31/NT31C has a function for sounding a buzzer in response to an instruction from the host, or when an error occurs. It is possible to set whether or not the
buzzer actually sounds with the memory switches.
• ON:
The buzzer sounds in response to instructions and when an error occurs.
• OFF:
The buzzer does not sound in response to instructions or when errors occur.
• ERROR ON:
The buzzer sounds only when an error occurs.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
169
Section
System Settings
Reference:
6-9
There are other instructions and settings relating to the buzzer, but this
memory switch setting has the highest priority.
For details on the buzzer, refer to 2-15-5 Buzzer Function in the Reference
Manual.
Set the buzzer sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Buzzer Sound to display ON, OFF,
or ERROR ON.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-5 Setting the Printer Controller
The NT31/NT31C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it
in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT31/NT31C.
Three types of printer can be connected to the NT31/NT31C: select the type
used with this memory switch setting.
• ESC/P:
Printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J83C (color) printer control
specifications or printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome) control specifications.
170
Section
System Settings
6-9
• PC-PR201H:
Printers that can emulate the PC-PR201H, made by NEC Corp.
• PCL 5:
Printers that conform to the PCL 5 printer control specifications.
Note that the NT31 can only be used with the monochrome Tone setting and
does not support color printing.
For the NT31, the Print Method is fixed as Tone.
The default (factory) setting is ESC/P.
Reference:
In addition to this setting, NT31C has the Print Method setting (page 172).
For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference
Manual.
Set the printer controller setting by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Printer Controller to display the required printer type.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
171
Section
System Settings
6-9
6-9-6 Setting the Print Method (NT31C Only)
The NT31/NT31C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it
in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT31/NT31C.
When using the NT31C, the currently displayed screen image or other data can
be printed out in color. You can select whether screen data is actually printed out
in color, or in monochrome tones that represent colors, with this memory switch
setting.
When PCL 5 is set for Printer Controller, the setting is fixed as Tone.
• Color: Color images are printed in color.
• Tone:
Color images are printed in monochrome tones.
The default (factory) setting is Tone.
Reference:
In addition to this setting, NT31C has the Printer Controller setting (page 170).
For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference
Manual.
Set the print method setting by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press Print Method to display the required
printing method.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
172
Section
System Settings
6-9
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement
The NT31/NT31C has a function to prevent the formation of an afterimage by
turning off the screen display if no operation is performed for a certain period of
time, and then displaying character strings at random positions and in random
colors (the colors only change for the NT31C).
The Screen Saver Movement setting determines whether or not these character
strings are displayed while the screen display is off.
If Display is selected, the character string stored in character string memory
table No. 0 is displayed.
If Display erase is selected, the character string is not displayed, and the backlight is also turned off while the screen display is off.
The default (factory) setting is Display erased.
The screen saver can be canceled, and former screen redisplayed, by any of the
following operations.
• Touching any part of the touch panel
• Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
• Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
• Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
• Changing the backlight mode
• Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
• Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference:
The time before the screen is turned OFF is set by the Screen Saver Start up
Time setting. For details, refer to 6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time
(page 175).
Even if its operation has been set with the Screen Saver Movement setting, the
screen saver function will not be executed if 000 is set for Screen Saver Start
up Time.
Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT31/NT31C. In
System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not started.
173
Section
System Settings
6-9
Set the screen saver operation by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory
switch setting screen.
Press Screen Saver Movement to display
Display or Display erased.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
174
Section
System Settings
6-9
6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time
The NT31/NT31C has a function to maximize the service life of the backlight and
prevent the formation of an afterimage by turning off the screen display and the
backlight if no operation is performed for a certain period of time.
The Screen Saver Start up Time setting determines the time interval before the
screen saver function operates.
The setting range is 0 to 255 minutes. The default (factory) setting is 10 minutes.
If 000 is set, the screen saver function does not operate.
The screen saver can be canceled, and previous screen redisplayed, by any of
the following operations.
• Touching any part of the touch panel
• Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
• Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
• Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
• Changing the backlight mode
• Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
• Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference:
It is possible to display the character string stored in character string memory
table No. 0 at random positions and in random colors while the screen display
is off. For details, refer to 6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver Movement (page 173).
Note however that, when this feature is used, the backlight does not go off.
For details on the screen saver function, refer to 2-15-4 Screen Saver Function
in the Reference Manual.
Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT31/NT31C. In
System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not started.
175
Section
System Settings
6-9
Set the screen saver start-up time by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Set a time in the input field to the right of
Screen Saver Start up Time.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and − keys.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
176
Section
System Settings
6-9
6-9-9 Setting the History Display Method
The NT31/NT31C features the display history record function, which records the
time at which screens are displayed during operation and the number of times
they are displayed, and the alarm history record function, which continually
monitors bit statuses at the host and records the time when bits come ON and
the number of times they come ON.
The Hist. Disp. Method setting determines whether — when these record data
are displayed in sort by occurrence — the records are displayed in a progression
from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest.
• From Old Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the oldest to newest.
• From New Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the newest to oldest.
The default (factory) setting is From New Data.
Reference:
When the voltage of the NT31/NT31C’s built-in battery becomes low, the history record contents cannot be retained.
For details on the display history record function and the alarm history record
function, refer to 2-15-1 Display History Record Function and 2-15-2 Alarm
History Record Function in the Reference Manual.
177
Section
System Settings
6-9
Set the history display method by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press Hist. Disp. Method to display the required display order.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
178
Section
System Settings
6-9
6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function
The NT31/NT31C has a function to keep the contents of the memory tables even
when the power to the NT31/NT31C is OFF and write back them to the host
when the power is turned ON.
If the resume function is OFF, the memory tables are initialized to these initial
values on switching to the RUN mode. If the resume function is ON, these are not
initialized and are kept the battery-backed up contents.
When the memory table is initialized, its contents are reset to the initial state that
is set by the Support Tool.
When the system is started up the next time, the screen is displayed using the
previous contents of the memory table.
• ON:
The resume function is used.
• OFF: The resume function is not used.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
Reference:
When the voltage of the NT31/NT31C’s built-in battery becomes low, the
memory table contents cannot be retained even if ON is set for the resume
function.
For details on the resume record function, refer to 2-15-3 Resume Function in
the Reference Manual.
179
Section
System Settings
6-9
Set the resume function by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory switch
setting screen.
Press Resume Function to display the required setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
180
Section
System Settings
6-9
6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function
The NT31/NT31C has a function for ignoring communication errors and automatically returning to the RUN mode when they occur.
The Comm. Auto-return setting determines whether the automatic reset function is effective or not.
• ON:
When a communication error occurs, the NT31/NT31C automatically returns
to the RUN mode without displaying an error screen (the System Initializing
screen may be displayed).
• OFF:
When a communication error occurs, an error screen is displayed and operation stops. Pressing OK on the error screen returns the NT31/NT31C to the
RUN mode.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
Reference:
If a communication error occurs when OFF is set for Comm. Auto-return, the
NT31/NT31C makes the number of attempts at communication with the host
specified by the setting for the Retry Counts touch switch (page 184). If communication cannot be re-established in any of these attempts, an error screen
is displayed.
For details on communication errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communication Errors and
Their Remedies (page 237).
181
Section
System Settings
6-9
Set the automatic reset function by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Press Comm. Auto-return to display the required setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
182
Section
System Settings
6-9
6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval
The NT31/NT31C goes into the time-out error status if no response is received
from the host within a fixed time. The Time-out Interval setting specifies the time
lapse at which time-out is judged to have occurred.
The setting range is 1 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 1 second.
Reference: Whether or not an error screen is displayed when a time-out error occurs is determined by the setting for the Comm. Auto-return memory switch.
Set the time-out interval by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Press Time-out Interval to display the required time lapse.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed, according to the following sequence.
01 02 03 .... 09 10 01 ....
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
183
Section
System Settings
6-9
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count
The NT31/NT31C does not immediately display an error screen when a communication error occurs, but tries to re-establish communication. The Retry Counts
setting specifies the number of attempts to be made to re-establish communication. If communication cannot be recovered within this number of attempts, the
following happens depending on the setting made for the Comm. Auto-return
memory switch (page 181).
• Comm. Auto-return ON:
Operation in the RUN mode is continued without displaying an error screen.
Regardless of the setting made for Retry Counts, attempts to re-establish
communication are repeated until normal communication is achieved.
• Comm. Auto-return OFF:
The RUN mode is ended and an error screen is displayed. On pressing the
OK touch switch on the error screen, the screen displayed immediately before is redisplayed and attempts are made to re-establish communication.
The System Menu can be displayed from the error screen by pressing any
two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously.
The setting range is 0 to 255 times. The default (factory) setting is 5 times.
Reference: For details on communication errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communication Errors and
Their Remedies (page 237).
184
Section
System Settings
6-9
Set the retry count by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory switch
setting screen.
Set a number of times in the input field to the
right of Retry Counts.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and − keys.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
185
Section 6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
The NT31/NT31C has a bar code reader input function which allows a bar code
reader to be connected and bar code data to read as character strings into character string input fields.
This section describes the communication conditions for the bar code reader
and the setting method for confirming the input data.
Reference:
For details on bar code reader types and connection methods, refer to 3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader in this manual and for details on how to use a
bar code reader refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings in
the Reference Manual.
The bar code reader is connected to serial port A. This means that serial port B
must be used for communications with the host.
Communication Condition Settings for Bar Code Readers
Setting Item
Function
Setting Options
Page
Data bit length
Sets the bit length for the data bits.
7* or 8 bits
Page 187
Stop bit length
Sets the stop bit length for the data.
1 or 2* bits
Page 187
Parity bit
Sets the parity bit for the data.
None, odd, even*
Page 187
Communications
speed
Sets the communications speed for the bar code reader
4800, 9600*, or 19200
bps
Page 187
Input method
Sets the method for confirming data when it is input to a character string input field.
Manual: The data is confirmed with a touch switch. The data
can be corrected and character strings can be added.
Auto:
The data is automatically confirmed when it is input.
Manual*, Auto
Page 187
* Default (factory) setting
Setting the
Communication
Conditions and Setting
Method
Set the bar code reader communication conditions and method of confirmation
at input by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Memory Switch.
186
Section 6-10
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the fourth memory switch
setting screen.
Press Comm. A Method to select Bar-Code
Reader.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Press the Set touch switch to the right of
Comm. A Method.
Display the required setting for each item by
pressing the touch switches.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
Press Quit.
Pressing Abort on the communication condition/confirmation method setting
screen causes the NT31/NT31C to return to the memory switch setting screen
(4/4) without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).
On completion of communication condition/confirmation method setting, the
NT31/NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
187
Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Section 6-10
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press the
Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT31/NT31C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings, press
the Abort touch switch. The NT31/NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.
188
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11 System Maintenance
The NT31/NT31C has the following maintenance and check functions.
Item
Function
Page
I/O Settings
Adjustment of display panel contrast and brightness of the backlight.
Page 189
Calendar Check
Display and setting of the time data of the NT31/NT31C clock function.
Page 193
PT Settings
Direct connection setting of the screen data in the NT31/NT31C and display of the
setting statuses of the serial ports.
Page 195
Display history record Display and printing of display history record data.
Page 196
Alarm history record
Display and printing of alarm history record data.
Page 198
Screen data check
Display of each screen stored in the NT31/NT31C.
Page 200
Device check Checking of the I/O functions of the NT31/NT31C.
Page 203
I/F check
Page 213
I/O
check
Checking of the communication functions of the NT31/NT31C.
This section describes how to use these functions.
6-11-1 I/O Settings
This function is used to adjust the contrast of the display panel and the brightness of the backlight.
With the NT31/31C, you can adjust the contrast and brightness settings using
either of the following two methods.
Setting from the System Menu
Adjusting the contrast: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/
Contrast Adjust.
Adjusting the brightness: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/
Brightness Adjust.
Setting Using Special Screen During PT Operation
You can set the brightness and contrast by displaying the screen with the following number, using a touch switch with a switch screen function, or by specifying
the display screen in the PT status control area.
Screen number 9030: Brightness and contrast adjustment screen.
Contrast Adjustment
The NT31/NT31C allows the contrast to be adjusted in 100 steps. The CONTRAST ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment while actually
checking the contrast on the screen. Once the contrast has been set, it remains
in effect even if the power is turned OFF or the NT31/NT31C is reset (and even if
the voltage of the built-in battery becomes low).
189
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Setting from the System Menu
Adjust the contrast of the display panel by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Settings.
Select Contrast Adjust.
Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in
the left half of the screen.
[ ]: Increase 10 steps
[]:
Increase 1 step
[]:
[ ]:
Decrease 1 step
Decrease 10 steps
Press Quit.
The contrast is set and the NT31/NT31C
returns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU
screen.
190
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen
Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen function, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.
Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in
the right half of the screen.
[ ]: Increase 10 steps
[]:
Increase 1 step
[]:
[ ]:
Decrease 1 step
Decrease 10 steps
Press Quit.
The contrast is set, and the NT31/NT31C
returns to the previous screen.
Backlight Brightness
Adjustment
The NT31/NT31C allows the brightness of the backlight to be adjusted in 3
steps. The BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment
while actually checking the brightness on the screen. The length of hours the
backlight lasts in a normal temperature are as follows.
High contrast:
Low, middle contrast:
10,000 hours (NT31-ST121-EV2, NT31C-ST141-EV2)
50,000 hours (NT31-ST122-EV2, NT31C-ST142-EV2)
25,000 hours (NT31-ST121-EV2, NT31C-ST141-EV2)
191
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Setting from the System Menu
Adjust the backlight brightness by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Settings.
Select Brightness Adjust.
Adjust the contrast with the High, Middle, and
Low touch switches in the left half of the
screen.
Press Quit.
The contrast is set and the NT31/NT31C returns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU screen.
192
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen
Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen function, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.
Adjust the brightness with the touch switches
(High, Middle, Low) in the left half of the
screen.
Press Quit.
The brightness is set, and the NT31/NT31C
returns to the previous screen.
6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock
The NT31/NT31C has a clock function for setting and displaying the date and
time.
This section describes how to display and set the clock data by menu operation
from the System Menu.
Reference:
The clock function does not strictly check the date and day of the week settings. When setting the clock data, be sure to set the correct date and day of
the week. If a mistake is made — for example entering a value in the range 13
to 19 when entering the month — the buzzer sounds three times.
Make sure that the data is correct when the month changes.
Numeral memory tables 247 to 255 are reserved for the clock function. Clock
data can be displayed and set during operation of the NT31/NT31C by using
these numeral memory tables.
For details on the clock function, refer to 2-15-6 Clock Function in the Reference Manual.
No clock data is set on shipment from the factory.
The clock data is backed up by the built-in battery of the NT31/NT31C. If the
battery voltage becomes low, the clock data cannot be retained when the power to the NT31/NT31C is turned OFF or the NT31/NT31C is reset and the clock
function will not operate correctly.
When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for
System Setting in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to set the date
and time.
193
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Display/set clock data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Calendar Check.
Press Set.
If you are just checking the display, press
Quit at this point; the NT31/NT31C will return
to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU
screen.
Set the date.
Each of the digits of the year, month, date,
hour, minute, and second settings, and the
day of the week setting, are touch switches:
press these touch switches to change the corresponding settings.
Press Quit.
The clock data is set and the NT31/NT31C returns to the date and time display.
• Pressing Abort causes the NT31/NT31C to return to the date and time display
without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).
194
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status
The direct connection settings of the NT31/NT31C screen data, and the settings
for serial port A and serial port B, can be checked.
Screen Configuration and Display Contents
There are the following three PT setting status screens.
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)
Display Contents of The First Screen
Item
Meaning
Screen Data Type
The host type set for the screen data
PT Control Area
Word at the host to which the PT status control area is allocated
PT Notification Area
Word at the host to which the PT status notify area is allocated
Window Control
Area
Word at the host to which the window control area is allocated
Numeric Expression
Default for the method of interpretation of the contents of
host words to which numeral memory tables are allocated
(numeric value storage method).
Expansion I/F
Type of unit installed at the expansion interface connector
Compatibility
Sets whether or not to use NT30/620 compatible mode for
screen data. (Sets whether to operate as a normal NT31/631
or emulate many key NT30/620 characteristics.)
Display Contents of The Second Screen
Item
Meaning
Comm. Port A
Communication type set for serial port A (fixed as RS-232C)
Comm. Method
Communication method set for serial port A
Comm. Setting
Communication conditions set for serial port A (display contents differ according to the communication method)
Display Contents of The Third Screen
Item
Meaning
Comm. Port B
Communication type set for serial port B
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
Comm. Method
Communication method set for serial port B
Comm. Setting
Communication settings set for serial port B (display contents differ according to the communication method)
195
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Display Method
Display the PT setting statuses by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select PT Settings.
Switch the screen as required by pressing the
[↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous screen)
touch switch.
Press Quit.
The NT31/NT31C returns to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record
The display history record function is a function that records the order of display
of each screen during operation, and the number of times each screen is displayed. Only the screens for which the display history screen attribute has been
set in advance are processed by this function.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the
NT31/NT31C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the display history record data
recorded in the NT31/NT31C.
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (display time order)
and sort by frequency (order of number of times displayed).
196
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Reference:
With the NT31/NT31C, the record data can also be displayed by calling screen
No. 9001 (sort by occurrence) or screen No. 9002 (sort by frequency) during
the RUN mode.
For details on the display history record function, refer to 2-15-1 Display History Record Function in the Reference Manual.
The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or from
newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch (page 177).
The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the
Printer Controller (page 170) and Print Method (page 172) memory switches.
Display and print the display history record data by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Display History.
Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Frequency.
If necessary, select the next or previous
screen by pressing [↓] (next screen) or [↑]
(previous screen).
The example screen to the left shows a
display for the sort by occurrence method
(from oldest record).
197
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
If required, press Prt. to print the display history record data.
Press Quit.
The NT31/NT31C returns to the DISPLAY
HISTORY MENU screen.
Example Print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently displayed screen.
Example:
Sort by occurrence, from oldest record
No.
Scrn YY/MM/DD HH:MM Comment
1
1
98/01/12
10:21
Coolant Error
2
2
98/01/12
11:53
Motor Error
3
8
98/01/13
09:35
Compressor Error
4
2000
98/01/13
14:22
Emergency Stop
01/01
6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record
The alarm history record function is a function that continually monitors, during
operation, the status of bits at the host designated in advance with a bit memory
table, and records the time when these bits come ON, and the number of times
they come ON.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to the
NT31/NT31C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the alarm history record data
recorded in the NT31/NT31C.
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (ON time order) and
sort by frequency (order of number of times the bits have come ON).
Reference:
With the NT31/NT31C, the record data can also be displayed by registering an
alarm history display element on the screen.
For details on the alarm history record function, refer to 2-15-2 Alarm History
Record Function in the Reference Manual.
The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or from
newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch (page 177).
The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the
Printer Controller (page 170) and Print Method (page 172) memory switches.
198
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Display and print the alarm history record data by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Alarm History.
Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Frequency.
If necessary, select the next or previous
screen by pressing [↓] (next screen) or [↑]
(previous screen).
The example screen to the left shows a display for the sort by occurrence method (from
oldest record).
If required, press Prt. to print the display history record data.
199
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Press Quit.
The NT31/NT31C returns to the ALARM
HISTORY MENU screen.
Example Print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently displayed screen.
Example:
Sort by occurrence method, from oldest record
No. Comment
YY/MM/DD HH:MM 01/01
1
Remote I/O Error
98/02/06
16:02
2
PIC Unit Error
98/02/07
09:21
3
Cycle Time Over
98/02/17
15:44
6-11-6 Checking Screen Data
The NT31/NT31C allows the registered screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) to be displayed
and checked by operation from the System Menu.
Reference:
Window screens cannot be displayed by operation from the System Menu.
Only the user screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) can be displayed. Screens for system
use cannot be displayed.
Specifying The Display Method
Specify the display method for the screens as indicated in the table below.
Setting Item
Display of Lamp/
Touch SW No.
Function
Allows designation of whether the bit number of the lamp bit set for a lamp or touch
switch is displayed or not.
The display format is as follows L (: area type, : bit
number).
Setting
Options
ON, OFF*
Display of Memory Allows designation of whether the table numbers of numeral and character string
Table No.
memory tables are displayed or not.
The display format for numeral memory tables is N and the display format for
character string memory tables is S.
This function is valid for the following display elements.
- Numeral displays
- Character string displays
- Bar graphs
- Numeral setting input fields (including thumbwheel type)
- Character string input fields
ON, OFF*
Display of image/
Library No.
Allows designation of whether image/library code numbers are displayed or not.
ON, OFF*
Display of Broken
Line Frame
Allows designation of whether or not broken line frames are displayed around the display elements for showing the positions registered.
ON, OFF*
* Default (factory) setting
Reference: Each setting of the screen data check is effective only on this menu. Exiting from
this screen data check menu resets the settings to the default (all the settings are
set to OFF).
200
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Operations On The SCREEN DATA CHECK Screen
The function shown below can be set on the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen.
Use this function as required when displaying complex screens on which multiple display elements have been registered overlapping each other.
a) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
c)
b) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
a) Display the previous display element on the upper most portion of the
screen in the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding fixed display elements).
b) Display the next display element on the upper most portion of the screen
in the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding
fixed display elements).
c) Return to the screen on which screens are specified.
201
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Displaying the SCREEN
DATA CHECK Screen
Display the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select Screen Data Disp.
Specify the screen to be displayed in the input
field in the middle of the screen.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and − keys.
Press Set.
Press the touch switches to specify the display method in each case.
The setting option changes each time a touch
switch is pressed.
202
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Press Quit to return to the screen number
selection screen.
Press Disp.
BOILER OPERATION
T 015003
RUN
T 015301
STOP
L 020000
L 020005
Start
Confirmation
Stop
Confirmation
T 016312
ERROR
L 020013
Error
Occurrence
BOILER OPERATION
T 015003
RUN
T 015301
STOP
L 020000
L 020005
Start
Confirmation
Stop
Confirmation
T 016312
ERROR
Touching the top or bottom of the screen
changes the way the display elements overlap each other in the order in which they are
registered.
In this example, the bottom portion of the
touch switch, which is under the lamp, will be
displayed over the lamp.
When you have finished checking the screen,
press the central part of the screen to return
to the screen number selection screen.
L 020013
Error
Occurrence
If you wish to continue by checking another screen, repeat the operation, starting by specifying the screen number.
To end the operation, press Quit on the screen number selection screen. The
NT31/NT31C returns to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
6-11-7 Device Check
The NT31/NT31C provides checks on the functions of the following items.
• Buzzer
Page 203
• LED
Page 204
• LCD
Page 206
• Backlight
Page 207
• Screen data memory
Page 207
• Touch switches
Page 210
• Battery voltage
Page 212
Checking the Buzzer
Check if the buzzer sounds correctly.
203
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Reference: The buzzer will sound in this check regardless of the setting made with the Buzzer Sound memory switch.
Check the buzzer by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown
below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Buzzer Check.
• If the buzzer functions correctly, it will sound continuously. At this time, the
Buzzer Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
• To stop the buzzer while it is sounding, press the Buzzer Check touch switch
again.
Checking the RUN LED
204
Check if the RUN LED functions normally.
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Check the RUN LED by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select LED Check.
• If the RUN LED is functioning normally, it will operate as follows. At this time the
LED Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
Lit in green OFF lit in red OFF lit in green...
• To end the LED check, press the LED Check touch switch on the DEVICE
CHECK MENU screen again.
205
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Checking the LCD
(Screen Display)
Check if the LCD (screen display) functions normally by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select LCD Check.
• The check screen displays all the dots on the screen: either press anywhere on
the touch panel or wait for three seconds and all the dots will be cleared.
With the NT31C, the display and clearance of all the dots on the screen is
repeated for each color in turn (red green blue magenta cyan yellow white
black).
On completion of the display and clearance of all dots, the NT31/NT31C returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
• To abort the LCD check, press the top right corner of the touch panel. The
NT31/NT31C will return to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
206
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Checking the Backlight
Check if the backlight functions normally by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Backlight Check.
• If the backlight is normal, it flashes. At this time, the Backlight Check touch
switch is displayed in reverse video.
• To end the backlight check, press the Backlight Check touch switch again.
Screen Data Memory
Check
Reference:
Check if the screen data memory is functioning normally.
In the screen data memory check, a write test is performed on the screen data
memory. Since all the screen data in the NT31/NT31C is lost in this check,
confirm that this data is backed up at the Support Tool or memory unit before
executing it.
If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting for System Settings in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to execute a screen data
check.
207
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Once a screen data check has been started, it cannot be stopped.
Check the screen data memory by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Screen Memory.
Press Execute.
• During the check, the message Checking Now... is displayed.
208
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
• On normal completion of the check, the message Memory Check OK is displayed.
• If an error is discovered in the check, the message Memory Check NG is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to
the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
209
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Checking Touch
Switches
Check whether or not the touch switches function normally by following the
menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Touch Switch.
Press the touch switches displayed on the
screen. A touch switch is normal if it is displayed in reverse video while pressed.
To end the check, press the touch switch at the top right corner (NT31: displayed
in reverse video; NT31C: displayed in yellow). The NT31/NT31C will return to
the DEVICE CHECK MENU.
210
System Maintenance
Reference:
Section 6-11
The functions of touch switches pressed during the I/O check are not notified
to the host.
The check cannot be performed until the touch switch at the top right corner is
displayed in reverse video (for NT31) or displayed in yellow (NT31C). Start the
check after the status of the touch switch at the top right corner has changed.
211
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Checking the Battery
Voltage
Check the voltage of the NT31/NT31C’s built-in battery by following the menu
operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select Device Check.
Select Battery.
The voltage is within the normal range. or
The voltage is lowered. is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to
the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
212
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Note When The voltage is lowered is displayed, replace the built-in battery immediately. For details on the replacement method, refer to 7-3-1 Replacing the Battery (page 242).
6-11-8 Checking Interfaces
The NT31/NT31C allows the following communication functions to be checked.
• Communication with the Support Tool Page 213
• Communication at serial ports
Page 215
• Communication with printers
Page 218
213
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Checking
Communication with the
Support Tool
Check communication with the Support Tool by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select I/F Check.
Select Tool Comm..
The check on communication with the Support Tool starts.
• If communication with the Support Tool is normal, data transmitted from the
Support Tool is displayed as hexadecimal data when received by the
NT31/NT31C.
214
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
After confirming the result of the test, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to the
I/F CHECK MENU screen.
Checking
Communication at Serial
Ports
Check communication at the serial ports (A, B).
Check Screen
The check screen and check method differ according to the communication
method set for the port to be checked.
For Host Link
Example: Serial port A while using the host link
Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communication is sent to
the host, and is displayed as the Sending Data in hexadecimal.
• If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed at
Received Data in hexadecimal.
• If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions
with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this indicates
that there is a communication fault, check the communication cables and settings.
For NT Link (1:1 or 1:N)
Example: Serial port B while using the NT Link (1:N)
Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communication is sent to
the host, and is displayed as ∗∗ symbols at Sending Data.
• If communication with the host is normal, the reply from the host is displayed at
Received Data as ∗∗ symbols.
• If a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions
with the host, a communication error screen is displayed. Since this indicates
that there is a communication fault, check the communication cables and settings.
215
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
For Memory Link
Example: Serial port A while using the memory link
The check is started as soon as the check screen is displayed. Send the command from the host.
• If communication with the host is normal, the data received from the host is displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.
• If nothing is displayed at Received Data when the command is sent from the
host, there is a communication fault: check the communication cables and settings.
For a Bar Code Reader
The check starts when the check screen is displayed. Read data with the bar
code reader in this status.
• If communication with the bar code reader is normal, the read character strings
are displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.
• If nothing is displayed at Received Data when data is read with the bar code
reader, there is a communication fault: check the communication cables and
settings.
216
Section 6-11
System Maintenance
Check Method
Check communication with the serial ports by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select I/F Check.
Select Comm. Port A or Comm. Port B.
The check screen is displayed (Check
screen, page 215).
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to
the I/F CHECK MENU screen.
217
System Maintenance
Section 6-11
Checking
Communication with a
Printer
Check communication with a printer by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 3.10
Select Maintenance Mode.
Select I/O Check.
Select I/F Check.
Select Printer.
Confirm that a printer is connected to the
NT31/NT31C, then press Execute: Printer
Interface Check will be printed out at the
printer.
• While data is being sent to the printer, the message Checking Now... is displayed.
• When the sending of data to the printer is completed, Finished Normal by Printer Interface Check is displayed.
218
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
• If data does not reach the printer within 60 seconds after sending starts, the
message ‘Finished Printer output failed’ is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT31/NT31C returns to
the I/F CHECK MENU screen.
6-12 Programming Console Function
The NT31/NT31C has been equipped with the Programming Console function,
which allows it to be used like a C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console for
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE (-Z)E, CS-series
CS1G/CS1H, or SRM1 PLCs.
Except for recording (saving) ladder programs on cassette tape and replaying
(reading) them, almost all the functions of a Programming Console can be
executed.
Note When the programmable controller functions are used, carefully check that the
system is safe before carrying out the following operations.
• Changing monitor data
• Switching the operating mode
• Forced set or reset
• Changing a present value or set value
6-12-1 Usable Systems
The Programming Console function can communicate with the PLC with the
communication methods indicated in the following table.
219
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
Communication
Method
Communication
Type
NT Link
(1:1)
RS-232C
NT Link
(1:N)
Applicable PLCs
Connected Port
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
CPM2A-30CD-(*1)
CPM2A-40CD-(*1)
CPM2A-60CD-(*1)
CPM2C-10-(*2)
CPM2C-20-(*2)
CQM1-CPU4-EV1(*1)
CQM1H-CPU21(*1)
CQM1H-CPU51(*1)
CQM1H-CPU61(*1)
SRM1-C02-V2
CPU built-in RS-232C
port
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1A-10CD-
CPM1A-20CD-
CPM1A-30CD-
CPM1A-40CD-
Peripheral port (*3)
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)(*1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)(*1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)(*1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)(*1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)(*1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)(*1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)(*1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)(*1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)(*1)
CPU built-in
RS-232C port
Peripheral port (*4)
*1: The peripheral port Programming Console always has priority. If a Programming
Console is connected later, the Programming Console function of the
NT31/NT31C is invalidated and operation from the NT31/NT31C becomes
impossible.
*2: The CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable splits the PLC’s Communication Port into
a RS-232C port and a peripheral port.
*3: An RS-232C cable cannot be connected to the peripheral port. An RS-232C
adapter (CPM1-CIF01) is required.
*4: The RS-232C cable cannot be directly connected to the peripheral port. An
RS-232C converting cable (CS1W-CN118) is required.
Reference: Note that the Programming Console function cannot be used with CPM1, CQM1,
and C200HX/HG/HE PLCs of the following lot numbers.
CPM1: 5, *6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
CQM1: 3, 4, 5, *6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
C200HX/HG/HE: 5 *6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
220
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
6-12-2 Connection Method
CQM1, CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), or
SRM1
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Refer to
Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC.
* When using the Programming Console function with a CQM1H, turn ON pin 7 of
the DIP switch on the front of the CQM1H’s CPU Unit.
CPM1 or CPM2A
The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). With a CPM1, connect the RS-232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C
Adapter or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PLC.
CPM2C
The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Connect to the
PLC’s communications connector with a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118
Connecting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PLC.
* When using the Programming Console function with a CPM2C, turn ON pin 2 of
the DIP switch on the front of the CPM2C’s CPU Unit.
CS1G/CS1H
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:N) (standard or
high-speed). Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port
or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on
connecting to the PLC. The standard or high-speed 1:N NT Link can be used.
The Programming Console function can be used only when the PT’s unit number is set to 0. Only one unit using the Programming Console function can be
connected to each of the PLC’s ports (built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port).
When using the Programming Console function, make sure that the maximum
unit number for the PT is set to 0 in the PLC Setup of the CS1G/CS1H.
With the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console function cannot be used simultaneously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port. Furthermore, the Programming Console function cannot be started at the RS-232C port
while a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.
221
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
6-12-3 Method of Use
The Programming Console screen is displayed by operating the system menu
as described below.
Ver 3.10
Select Expansion Mode.
Select Programming Console.
The Programming Console screen is displayed.
Press the Programming Console sheet keys
(touch switches) for the operation.
Press the Quit touch switch to exit the
screen.
An error is displayed if a wrong communication protocol is selected or a Programming
Console is connected to the peripheral
port.(*1)
*1: With the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console function cannot be used
simultaneously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port.
Reference: When an error screen is displayed, the system menu can be displayed by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously. The Check touch
switch on the screen can also be used to display the system menu, but it will not
work unless the cause of the error has been removed. If the system menu is not
displayed when the Check touch switch is pressed, press two of the four corners
of the touch panel to return to the system menu.
222
Section 6-12
Programming Console Function
Key Operations
Mode Selection Keys, Mode Lock Key
The display element on the Programming Console screen shown below comprises the mode selection keys, which change the operation mode of the PLC,
and the mode lock key, which prevents unintended mode changes.
Mode selection keys
Mode lock key
The RUN, MONITOR, and PROGRAM mode selection key elements are touch
switches and pressing them causes the PLC operation mode to change (unlike
an actual Programming Console, it is possible to switch directly between the
RUN mode and the PROGRAM mode.)
When the Programming Console function is started, the PLC operation status is
read and reflected at the PLC.
The mode lock key element is also a touch switch, and it alternates between the
lock ON (with no key displayed) and lock OFF (with key displayed) states when
pressed. During the lock ON state, mode selection key operations are ineffective. The mode displays change as indicated in the figures below during the lock
ON status and during the lock OFF status.
When the Programming Console function starts, the lock ON status is established.
If the RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM mode selection key is pressed in the lock
OFF status, the mode changes and the lock ON status is established.
During Lock OFF
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
During Lock ON
RUN mode
Programming Console Keyboard
The Programming Console keyboard used on the screen when the Programming Console function is used is comprised entirely of touch switches (shown by
the dashed line frames in the figure below). On pressing a touch switch, a key
operation is executed. However, since there is a discrepancy between the size
of the displayed keys and the size of the touch switches, take care to press as
close to the center of the key as possible by referring to the figure below.
In addition, if the connected host is the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console
key sheet for the CS Series is automatically displayed.
223
Programming Console Function
Section 6-12
Standard Programming Console Key Sheet
Programming Console Key Sheet for CS1 Series
Differences with Respect to Programming Consoles
• Programs cannot be stored (recorded) or read (replayed). If it is necessary to
store or read a program, use a Programming Device.
• It is not possible to adjust the volume of the key press sound. Whether or not
the key press sound sounds is determined by the setting for the Key Press
Sound memory switch of the NT31/NT31C. It sounds when the setting is ON
and does not when the setting is OFF (page 168).
• If an error occurs when using the Programming Console function, an error
screen is displayed. Whether or not the buzzer sounds at this time is determined by the setting for the Buzzer Sound memory switch of the NT31/NT31C
(page 169).
Reference: A communications error will occur if you use the Programming Console function
to change the communications settings (in the PLC Setup) that govern the port to
which the NT31/NT31C is connected. In this case, the Programming Console
function will be unusable.
224
Section 6-13
Device Monitor Function
6-13 Device Monitor Function
The NT31/NT31C has been equipped with the Device Monitor function which
can be used to change the PLC’s operating mode, read/change words in the
PLC’s data areas, and display the PLC’s error log of a CS1G/CS1H, CPM1,
CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, or SRM1.
The Device Monitor can perform the following operations:
• Changing the PLC’s operating mode
• Displaying/changing the contents of words, displaying/changing the status of
bits, force-setting/force-resetting the status of bits (Registration Monitor)
• Listing the contents of a range of words (Continuous Monitor)
• Displaying the error log and clearing errors (Error Log)
This section provides an overview of the Device Monitor function and explains
how to connect to the PLC. For more details, refer to 2-16 Device Monitor Function in the Reference Manual.
! Caution
Be sure that it is safe to proceed before using the Device Monitor function to perform one of the following operations from the PT.
Changing monitored data
Switching the PLC’s operating mode
Force setting or force resetting bits
Changing PVs or SVs
Reference:
The Device Monitor function can be used with Ver. 3.0 and higher versions of
the PT system program only.
The Device Monitor functions are almost identical to the functions of the Data
Access Console (DAC).
The Device Monitor function cannot be used with host link or memory link communications.
225
Section 6-13
Device Monitor Function
6-13-1 Compatible Systems
The following table shows the combinations of communications methods and
PLCs that can support the PT’s Device Monitor function.
Communications
method
1:1 NT Link
1:N NT Link
PLC model
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)E
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CPM1-10CDR-*1
CPM1-20CDR-*1
CPM1A-10CD-*1
CPM1A-20CD-*1
CPM1A-30CD-*1
CPM1A-40CD-*1
CPM2A-30CD-
CPM2A-40CD-
CPM2A-60CD-
CPM2C-10-*2
CPM2C-20-*2
CQM1-CPU4-EV1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
SRM1-C02-V2
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)E
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
SRM1-C02-V2
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
*1: A CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter is required.
*2: Use a Conversion Cable (CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118), CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect to the PLC.
6-13-2 Connection Method
CQM1H or
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE)
The 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link can be used. The connection method is exactly
the same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. Refer to Section 4 Connecting to
the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC.
CQM1 or C200HS
The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is exactly the same as for
the 1:1 NT Link. Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C
Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details
on connecting to the PLC.
CPM1, CPM2A, or SRM1
The 1:1 NT Link can be used in all CPUs and the 1:N NT Link can also be used in
-V2 and higher versions of the SRM1. The connection method is exactly the
same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. With a CPM1, connect the RS-232C
cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter or
CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PLC.
CPM2C
226
The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is the same as for the NT
Link (1:1). Connect to the PLC’s communications connector with a CPM2C-
Section 6-13
Device Monitor Function
CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C
Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PLC.
CS1G/CS1H
The 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed) can be used. The connection method
is exactly the same as for the 1:N NT Link.
Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to
the PLC.
6-13-3 Method of Use
The Device Monitor screen is displayed by operating the system menu as described below.
Ver 3.10
Select Expansion Mode.
Select Device Monitor.
An error message will be displayed
if the wrong communications protocol is selected.
The Device Monitor screen is displayed.
Reference: When an error screen is displayed, the system menu can be displayed by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously. The Check touch
switch on the screen can also be used to display the system menu, but it will not
work unless the cause of the error has been removed. If the system menu is not
displayed when the Check touch switch is pressed, press two of the four corners
of the touch panel to return to the system menu.
For more details on operations of the Device Monitor function, refer to 2-16 Device Monitor Function in the Reference Manual.
227
Section 6-14
Version Display
6-14 Version Display
Use the Version Display function to check the version of the NT31/NT31C’s system program. The Version Display screen shows the model, creation date, and
version of the system program installed in the NT31/31C.
6-14-1 Method of Use
The Version Display screen is displayed by operating the system menu as described below.
Ver 3.10
Select Expansion Mode.
Select Version Display.
The system program’s version information will be
displayed as described below. Press the Quit
touch switch to exit the Version Display screen
and return to the Expansion Mode screen.
•
•
•
•
PT Model:
System program:
Version
Date
PT model number
System program name
System program version
Date program was created.
This screen is an example. Actual screens will
show the information specific to the PT and system program being used.
After checking the version information, press the Quit touch switch to exit the
Version Display screen and return to the Expansion Mode screen.
Reference:
The PT model always shows the model number of the ivory model of the PT.
The B suffix will not be displayed, even for black models.
The system program’s version number is also displayed in the upper-right corner of the System Menu.
The creation date does not always match the file date of the system program
installed with the System Installer.
228
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT, and how to carry out maintenance and inspection to
prevent the occurrence of errors.
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1 Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
233
233
235
236
237
237
239
242
243
229
Section
Troubleshooting
7-1
7-1
Troubleshooting
When a fault relating to the operation of the NT31/NT31C occurs, find the symptoms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding Remedy indicated in the table.
Note
1. Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
2. Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification.
NT31/NT31C Symptoms
Power LED fails to come
ON
Nothing is displayed on
the screen.
Cannot communicate with
the S
Support
pp Tool
Cannot communicate with
the host
Cannot switch from the
system initializing screen.
Communication error
message is displayed
when communicating to
the host.
Cause
Remedy
Power is not being supplied.
Check the connections and make sure that power is
supplied correctly. (3-1-3 Power Supply Connection,
page 31)
Power supply fuse has blown.
Contact your OMRON service center.
Screen No. 0 has been read at the
host side.
This is not an error. Change the screen number
from screen number 0. (Setting the screen number
to 0 turns the screen off.)
The system startup waiting time has
not elapsed yet.
This is not an error. The display will appear after the
waiting time has elapsed.
The Transmit mode has not been
established.
Display the System Menu and select the Transmit
mode. (6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data, page 153)
Not connected to the Support Tool.
Check the installation of the connector cable. (3-2
Connecting to the Support Tool, page 33)
The PT model setting and direct
connection setting at the Support
Tool do not match the NT31/NT31C.
Using the PT Configuration settings of the Support
Tool, set the PT model and direct connection
settings that match the NT31/NT31C.
Memory switch settings do not
match.
Check the communication setting in the Memory
Switch menu of the Maintenance mode, and match
the communication protocol settings for the host and
NT31/NT31C. (6-7 Setting Conditions for
Communications with Host by Using Memory
Switches, page 155)
NT31/NT31C and host are not
correctly connected.
Check that the type, length, and installation of the
connector cable match the specifications. (Section 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port, and
Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-422A/485 Port)
In an RS-422A/485 connection, the
terminator setting is incorrect.
Make the NT31/NT31C and PLC termination
resistance settings correctly. (Section 4 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port)
In an NT Link (1:N) connection, there Make the settings again so that there is no
is duplication in the unit numbers.
duplication. (6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method
(Standard/High-speed), page 161)
The buzzer has sounded
and the RUN
OFF.
U LED is O
The touch panel does not
respond.
p
The PLC mode has
changed to the monitor
mode.
230
The power to the NT31/NT31C,
NT-AL001 or host is OFF.
Check the power supply.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
The NT31/NT31 has developed
trouble.
Contact your OMRON service center.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
The touch panel is broken.
Test the touch panel with I/O Check in the
MAINTENANCE MODE menu. If there is an error,
contact your OMRON service center.
The NT31/NT31C changes the mode This is an NT31/NT31C specification. When using a
when host link communication is
PLC that can also be connected using the NT Link
used.
method, use an NT Link connection (there is no
mode change with the NT Link method).
Section
Troubleshooting
NT31/NT31C Symptoms
Cause
7-1
Remedy
The graph display does
not change.
One of the percentage display
settings — −100%, 0%, or 100% —
is incorrect.
Set the −100%, 0%, and 100% values in the
following relationship:
−100% value < 0% value < 100% value
The trend graph display
does not agree with the
actual time axis.
The cycle for graph display update
processing is longer than the set
sampling cycle.
Delete other elements on the same screen as the
trend graph that are allocated to the host and have
a high update frequency. Or lengthen the sampling
cycle.
The Programming
Console function cannot
be used.
The communication settings are
incorrect.
Set the communication method as follows when
using the Programming Console function.
With C-series PLC: 1:1 NT Link
With CS1-series PLC:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
A Programming Console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console and
the Programming Console function at the same
time. Disconnect the Programming Console.
The PLC does not support the
Programming Console function.
Not all PLCs support the Programming Console
function. Check the model of PLC you are using.
(6-12 Programming Console Function, page 219)
The system program for other
vendor’s PLCs has been installed.
(PLC models other than OMRON.)
The Programming Console function can be used
only when the system program for OMRON PLCs is
installed. Install the correct system program.
The communications settings are not
correct.
Set the communication method as follows when
using the Device Monitor function.
With C-series PLCs: 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link
With CS-series PLCs:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
The PLC does not support the
Device Monitor function.
Not all PLCs support the Device Monitor function.
Check the model of PLC you are using. Refer to
6-13 Device Monitor Function for details.
The system program installed in the
PT is for a PLC maker other than
OMRON.
The Device Monitor function can be used only when
the PT is connected to a PT with the system
program for OMRON PLCs installed. Install a
system program that supports the Device Monitor
function.
Since the memory table is allocated
to the host memory, the display is
updated in accordance with the
contents of the host memory.
When the contents of the memory table are set as a
fixed value, do not allocate the memory table to the
host.
The battery voltage has dropped and
the data in the memory table has
been destroyed.
Replace the battery and execute memory table
initialization. (7-3-1 Replacing the Battery, page 242,
and 6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables, page 145)
Since ON is set for the resume
function, the initial values of the
screen data memory are not written
to the memory tables.
Execute memory table initialization. (6-4-5
Initializing the Memory Tables, page 145)
If the resume function does not need to be used,
use the NT31/NT31C with the resume function OFF.
(6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function, page 179)
The numeral memory table is
specified as the destination for a
mathematical table’s results.
Calculations are executed continuously while the PT
is operating and the calculation results are
automatically written to the memory table. Specify
another numeral memory table or a word in the
host.
The Device Monitor
function cannot be used.
The memory table display
contents differ from the
initial value set at the
pp Tool.
Support
231
Section
Troubleshooting
NT31/NT31C Symptoms
Updating of numeric
values and text is
d l
d
delayed.
Some of the elements
arranged
g on a normal
di l
d
screen are not displayed.
Cause
7-1
Remedy
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
There are too many numeral/text
displays on the displayed screen.
Reduce the number of numeral/text displays on the
screen for which updating is delayed.
The cycle time is extended due to
heavy processing at the host.
Shorten the host cycle time.
In an RS-422A/485 connection,
there is illegal branching or an
erroneous terminator setting.
Wire correctly by referring to Section 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
The quantity of read data exceeds
the stipulated restriction.
Check the maximum number of elements by
referring
A of the
g to Display
p y Restrictions in Appendix
pp
R f
M
l C
h screen d
i
Reference
Manual.
Create the
data again
and then transmit all of the screen data in a batch to
the NT31/NT31C.
The total of the element coefficients
for the displayed screen is greater
than 1024.
On an overlapping screen, Since the data is transmitted from
some of the set elements the host in screen units, the number
are not displayed.
of elements on the overlapping
screen has exceeded the maximum
permissible without being checked
by the Support Tool.
Check the maximum number of elements by
referring to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the
Reference Manual. Create the screen data again
and then send all the screen data in a batch to the
NT31/NT31C.
The System Menu cannot
be called up.
Display System Menu under Change
System Settings in the System
Installer mode is set to Disabled.
In the System Installer mode, set Display System
Menu to Enabled (page 151).
The following System
Menu operations are not
possible.
- Establishing the
Transmit mode
- Displaying the memory
switch setting screens
- Screen data memory
check
- Displaying the
initialization menu
- Displaying the
calendar/time setting
screen
Screen Memory Protect under
Change System Setting in the
System Installer mode is set to
Disabled.
In the System Installer mode, set Screen Memory
Protect to Enabled (page 151).
Screen Memory Protect has been
set to Disabled because the PT
power supply was turned OFF during
deletion of screen data.
Do not turn the PT power OFF during deletion of
screen data.
In the System Installer mode, first change the
setting for Screen Memory Protect to Enabled, then
repeat the screen data delete operation (pages 151
and 152)
Cannot input numeric
values
The upper/lower (max./min.) limit
check for numeric value input is in
effect.
Check the screen data’s upper/lower (max./min.)
limit check setting for numeric value input, and
correct it if necessary. Refer to 2-12 Inputting
Numeric Values in the Reference Manual for details.
Cannot input numeric
values/character strings.
Bit 5 of the PT status control area
(numeral/character string input) is
set to 1 (ON).
Set bit 5 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status
Control Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual
for details.
The interlock function is set for the
input field and the controlling
interlock bit is OFF.
Inputs are prohibited in input fields when the
corresponding interlock bit is OFF. Check the status
of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON.
Window screen does not
open
Bit 6 of the PT status control area
(PT window opening) is set to 1
(ON).
Set bit 6 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status
Control Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual
for details.
Cannot switch screens
with touch switches
Bit 4 of the PT status control area
(PT screen switching) is set to 1
(ON).
Set bit 4 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status
Control Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual
for details.
Touch switch does not
work. (Buzzer sounds.)
The interlock function is set for the
touch switch and the controlling
interlock bit is OFF.
Touch switches are disabled when the
corresponding interlock bit is OFF. Check the status
of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON.
232
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
NT31/NT31C Symptoms
The display is dim.
Cause
7-2
Remedy
Insufficient contrast or brightness
Increase the contrast/brightness (pages 189 and
191).
Backlight defective, or its life has
expired
Replace the backlight (page 240).
The display is too faint.
The contrast is too high.
Reduce the contrast (page 189).
The digits in numeral
display come out as *.
The number of digits of a numeric
value in a numeral memory table
exceeds the set number.
• Confirm the values of the PLC words allocated to the
numeral memory table.
The numeric value in the numeral
memory table exceeds the number
of display digits.
• Check the values of the PLC words allocated to the
numeral memory table entry.
”**” or ”***” is displayed
in the numeral display or
numeral input field.
7-2
• Allocate one PLC word to each numeral memory
table.
• Allocate only one word to each numeral memory
table entry if the numeral display or numeral input
field has 4 digits or less.
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
When the NT31/NT31C displays an error message, find the corresponding
symptoms in the appropriate table below and respond by following the Remedy
indicated in the table.
For details of the error messages displayed when using memory unit and corrective action to take for them, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit (NT31/NT31C with
V) in page 37 or 3-6 Using a Memory Unit (NT31/NT31C without V) in page
45.
7-2-1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power to the
NT31/NT31C is turned ON and when operation starts, and their remedies.
Cause
Remedy
[No Comm. Protocol]
Set the comm. Protocol by
MAINTENANCE MODE.
Message
No communication protocol has
been set.
Communication protocol and
screen data type are mismatched
Using the memory switches, set the
communication method to be used for
communication with the host. (6-7 Setting
Conditions for Communications with Host
by Using Memory Switches, page 155)
[Screen Data Error]
Screen Data corrupted.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.
- The power was switched OFF
during screen data
initialization, checking, or
transmission.
- Transmission of screen data
was interrupted.
- Illegal data has been written to
the screen data memory.
Initialize the screen data memory by
operation at the System Menu, then
re-transmit the screen data. (6-4-1
Clearing Screen Data, page 138)
If the problem persists, contact your
OMRON service center.
[No Screen Data]
No Screen Data is saved in Screen
Memory.
Download Screen Data using by the
Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE, and download Screen Data
again.
No screen data is registered.
Transmit screen data from the Support
Tool.
233
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Message
7-2
Cause
Remedy
[No Direct Connection Info.]
No Direct Connection Information is set
in Screen Data.
Set Direct Connecting Information in
Screen Data using by the Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data
again.
Allocated words have not been
set for the PT status control area
and PT status notify area.
Allocate words for the PT status control
area and PT status notify area with the
Support Tool and then transmit the direct
connection information to the
NT31/NT31C.
[Incorrect Screen Data]
Screen Data in Screen Memory do not
match with the System Program.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.
The type of registered screen
data does not match that at the
NT31/NT31C.
Initialize the screen data memory, then
transmit the correct screen data. (6-4-1
Clearing Screen Data, page 138)
[No Starting Screen]
Specified Starting Screen is not saved.
Fix Screen Data using by the Support
Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data
again.
No data is registered for either
the screen number set in the PT
status control area or the Initial
Screen set with the Support Tool.
Or the screen number which
does not exist are registered.
Either specify a screen number for which
data is registered at the PT status control
area, or set the screen as the Initial
Screen in the System settings under PT
Configuration at the Support Tool.
[Touch Panel is disconnected]
The touch panel cable (film
cable) inside the NT31/NT31C is
disconnected.
Contact your OMRON service center.
[Memory Switch Corrupted]
Because Memory Switch setting was
last. Initialized Memory Switch setting.
Press Confirm to return to the SYSTEM
MENU.
The memory switches have been
initialized due to discovery of an
error in the memory switch
settings.
Set the memory switches again using the
System Menu and the System settings
under PT Configuration at the Support
Tool. (Section 6 System Menu Operation)
If the problem recurs, contact your
OMRON service center.
[Calendar Data Error]
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE and
set Calendar Data.
There is an error in the date/time
values due, for example, to low
battery voltage.
Check the battery voltage by checking
the color of the RUN LED and with the
battery check in the System Menu; if the
voltage is low, replace the battery with a
new one. (Checking the Battery Voltage,
page 212, and 7-3-1 Replacing the
Battery, page 242)
If the battery voltage is confirmed to be
normal, set the calendar clock correctly
from the System Menu. (6-11-2
Displaying/Setting the Calendar and
Clock, page 193)
[Backup Data Error]
Memory table and History data was
initialized by backup failure.
It can be caused by lowered voltage of
the battery.
Initialization has been executed
because of an error in the
backup data area.
Check the battery voltage by checking
the color of the RUN LED and with the
battery check in the System Menu; if the
voltage is low, replace the battery with a
new one. (Checking the Battery Voltage,
page 212, and 7-3-1 Replacing the
Battery, page 242) The re-transmit the
memory table data from the Support Tool.
If the voltage is normal and the problem
recurs, contact your OMRON service
center.
[With memory switch setting screen]
Invalid Comm. Method
Protocol settings for serial port A
and serial port B are
mismatched.
Refer to Possible Combinations of
Communication Method Settings in page
156 and set the protocol of serial port A
and serial port B so that their settings are
matched.
* Set serial port A to None when
connecting the Support Tool and the host
at the same time.
234
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
7-2-2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the
NT31/NT31C and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
[Address Setting Error]
Addressing Error exists in the
Screen.
Correct address setting by the
Support Tool.
The host side allocated words
and bits set with the Support Tool
are incorrect.
Set correct words and bits after checking the
area used at the host side by referring to PLC
Memory Map in Appendix D of the Reference
Manual or the operation manual for the PLC
being used.
[Memory Table No. Error]
Memory table No. is out of limit.
Correct the table No. by the
Support Tool.
The memory table number set
with the Support Tool is outside
the range for the number of
memory tables set in the system
memory.
Either increase the number of memory tables in
the System settings under PT Configuration at
the Support Tool, or set the memory table
number again within the established range.
[Programming Console Error]
Setting of Programming Console
Function is inadequate. It can be
caused by:
This PLC does not support Prog
g Console Function.
gramming
Protocol mismatch. Set the PLC
to NT Link.
“PROGRAMMING CONSOLE”
is connected to PLC.
The communication settings are
incorrect.
Set the communication method/communication
port as follows when using the Programming
Console function.
With C-series PLCs:1:1 NT Link
With CS-series PLCs:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
The PLC used does not support
the Programming Console
function.
Not all PLCs support the Programming Console
function. Check the model of the PLC you are
using. (6-12 Programming Console Function,
page 219)
A Programming Console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console
and the Programming Console function at the
same time. Disconnect the Programming
Console.
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page
32.
A Programming Console is
connected.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console
and the Programming Console function at the
same time. Disconnect the Programming
Console.
The communication conditions at
the PLC have been changed in
accordance with the
NT31/NT31C Programming
Console function.
Set the communication conditions at the PLC to
match the conditions set in the System Menu.
[Programming Consol Error]
Programming Console Function
does not RUN. It can be caused
by:
Connecting cable is faulty.
“PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
CONSOLE”
is connected to PLC.
Protocol mismatch between the
PT and PLC. Set the PLC to NT
Link.
235
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the NT31/NT31C data is
initialized, and during data setting and transmission, and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
[Flash Memory Error]
Flash Memory I/O Error.
If this happens frequently, Flash
Memory may be broken.
Press Reset Switch to restart.
There is a hardware fault, or the
flash memory (memory for
storing screen data) has reached
the end of its service life.
If the same message is displayed even after
clearing the screen data or transmitting screen
data several times, contact your OMRON
service center.
[Calendar Data Error]
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE
MODE and set Calendar Data.
Hardware fault, or system
program error
Set the calendar clock again from the System
Menu. If the problem recurs, delete the program
in the System Installer mode, then re-install the
program. (6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System
Program, page 149)
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
[Tool Transmit Error]
∗∗∗∗ Error detected while
downloading by the following
case:
faulty connecting cable.
corrupted data by noise.
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable. (Appendix F Making the Cable for
Connecting a PLC, page 269)
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page
32.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Check Sum Error occurs while
downloading by the following
case:
corrupted data by noise.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page
32.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Time-out Error occurs while
downloading by the following
case:
faulty connecting cable.
The connecting cable is
defective.
Check the cable connection and perform a
conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the
cable.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Reception was failed by Buffer
Over Flow Error.
The receive buffer has
overflowed.
Retransmit the data from the Support Tool.
236
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
7-2-4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors that may occur in the System Installer mode of
the NT31/NT31C, and the remedies for these errors.
Message
Cause
Remedy
System Program not exist or
incorrect.
- The system program has not
been installed.
- The system program has been
deleted due to a hardware
fault, or because the flash
memory (memory for storing
the system program) has
reached its life.
Select Download System Program and
download the system program (6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program, page
149).
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
Unable to erase System
Program.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
selection of Download System Program and
attempting to delete the system program several
times, contact your OMRON service center
(6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program,
page 149).
Unable to download System
Program.
- A communication error
occurred during downloading
of the system program.
- Illegal data has been written
into the screen data memory.
- Hardware fault, or flash
memory (memory for storing
the system program) has
reached its life.
Select Download System Program and
download the system program again (6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program, page
149).
Also refer to 7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen
Data Initialization and Transmission (page 236),
and take the corrective action described for tool
transmission errors.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
Unable to write System Settings.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
writing of system settings several times, contact
your OMRON service center.
If writing is normally terminated after the error
message was once displayed, the Memory
Switch setting for system program may have
been altered. In such a case, check and re-set
the setting in the Memory Switch menu of the
Maintenance mode.
Unable to erase Screen Data.
Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
screen data deletion several times, contact your
OMRON service center.
7-2-5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors relating to communication that can occur during operation, and their remedies.
Operation When a
Communication Error
Occurs
When a communication error occurs, the error message is displayed at the
NT31/NT31C, and the buzzer sounds, provided the setting made for Buzzer
Sound in the System Menu is other than OFF. An error message is displayed
provided the setting for the Comm. Auto-Return memory switch is not ON (note
that some error messages are displayed even if the setting is ON).
Operation When
Communication Errors
Occur
When an error message is displayed, remove the cause of the error and then
press the OK touch switch displayed on the screen. The NT31/NT31C will return
to the screen that was displayed before the error occurred, and operation will
restart.
Display of
Communication Errors
For communication errors, the name of the port at which the error occurred, the
error classification (send or receive error), the details of the error, the probable
cause, and the remedy, are displayed as shown below.
237
Section
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
Example:
Parity error at serial port A
Receive Errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
• Parity error
• Framing error
• Overrun error
• FCS (sum value) error
• Time out error
• Data over flow error
• PLC unit No. error (host link only)
• NAK received (in the case of the host link, the end code is also displayed)
• Undefined command error
Send Errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
• Time out error
• Data over flow error
Probable Causes and
Remedies
Error Details
Parity Error
Framing Error
Over-run Error
FCS (Check Sum) Error
238
The remedies to take in accordance with the displayed cause are indicated in the
table below.
Displayed Probable Cause
Remedy
Communication parameters/
conditions set incorrectly.
Check if the settings at the host for parity bit, frame
length, communications speed, stop bit length and
flow control agree with those at the NT31/NT31C.
The connecting cables are not
connected correctly.
Check the communication cable connection and
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault,
replace the cable. For details on communication
cables, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host
from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
The PLC is transmitting incorrect
data.
Check the operation at the host side.
Section
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
Error Details
Time-out Error
Displayed Probable Cause
7-3
Remedy
The connecting cables are not
connected correctly. (Send/Receive)
Check the communication cable connection and
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault,
replace the cable. For details on communication
cables, refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host
from the RS-232C Port, and Section 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
The communication service of the
host is stopped. (Send/Receive)
Check that the host is capable of communicating
with the NT31/NT31C (confirm that the
communication settings of the host and
NT31/NT31C match).
Time-out Interval is too short. (Send)
Set a longer value for Time-out Interval at the host
side.
Time-out Interval is too short.
(Receive)
Set a longer value for Time-out Interval in the
System Menu. (6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval,
page 183) It may also be possible to solve the
problem by shortening the host cycle time.
The unit # does not match that set
on the PLC.
Re-set the unit number at the host side to 0.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 32.
NAK received
——
Check the settings for allocated words and bits.
If noise is a possible factor, distance the cable from
sources of noise and insert a noise filter in the
power supply line.
If using the equipment in a location subject to a lot
of noise, use a cable with a high degree of
protection against noise for the transmission route.
Also make the cable as short as possible.
Undefined Command
E
Error
The host is not supported.
Check the PLC model used for the host.
Instruction level 3 is not effective.
Check that the instruction level setting for the host is
level 1, 2, 3.
Data Over Flow Error
Communication command from the
host is too long. (With memory link)
Set flow control method in the host.
Increase transmission interval.
Command transmission to the host
is not possible.
Check the communication cable.
Check the control method at the PT and the host.
Increase the communication on speed when it to
slow.
PLC Unit No. Error
7-3
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT31/NT31C is always
used in its optimum condition.
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of
these may result in electrical shock.
Spare PT
It is advisable to have a spare NT31/NT31C available to minimize system downtime in the event of an NT31/NT31C failure or if the screen display becomes difficult to read due to deterioration of the display unit.
Backlight
When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read
easily, replace the backlight. The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the
239
Section
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
7-3
NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141-EV2 while it is mounted in an operation
panel. The backlight for the NT31-ST122-EV2/NT31C-ST142-EV2 cannot
be replaced by the user. Contact your OMRON service center when the backlight needs to be replaced.
Replaceable Backlight Model
NT31C-CFL01 (for both NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141-EV2)
Guide to Backlight Replacement
Under normal conditions it can be assumed that the backlight will need to be replaced after about 25,000 hours when used at medium brightness (the figure is
about 10,000 hours when used at the high brightness setting). However, the life
of the backlight does vary, particularly in accordance with the temperature in the
environment in which it is used, and it should be replaced when it is getting dim
and the screen is getting hard to read. The life expectancy of the backlight for the
NT31-ST122-EV2/NT31C-ST142-EV2 at high brightness is 50,000 hours.
The backlight cannot be replaced by the user, however. Contact your OMRON
service center when the backlight needs to be replaced.
Notes on Replacing the
Backlight
Pay attention to the following points when replacing the backlight.
• Carry out the replacement work in a location where there is no danger that dust
or foreign bodies will enter the unit, and where no water will drip onto it.
Do not touch the printed circuit boards of the
NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141-EV2 with your bare hands.
Also, discharge the static electricity from your body before starting the work.
• Do not carry the backlight unit by holding only its cable, or pull on the cable. Do
not subject the backlight to excessive force or shock.
• Do not disassemble the product to repair or modify it.
Replacing the Backlight
Use the following procedure to replace the backlight.
WARNING
Switch OFF the NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141-EV2
power before replacing the backlight. Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not touch the backlight immediately after switching OFF the
power supply.
Otherwise burn injuries may result due to the high temperatures.
Replace the backlight by following the procedure given below:
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn the power supply to the NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141-EV2
OFF.
2. Disconnect the terminal block wiring, the communication cable, and the
printer cable. If a memory unit or interface unit is mounted, remove that unit
also.
240
Section
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
7-3
3. Open the cover of the CFL unit housing by following the procedure described below.
a) Unscrew the screw in the center of the cover.
The screw is designed so that it cannot be removed, but if it does come
out for some reason and falls inside the PT, it must be extricated without
fail.
b) Open the cover while pressing the tabs at its left and right inward.
c) When the cover has opened far enough, remove it.
b
b
b
4. Remove the CFL unit by following the procedure described below.
a) Disengage the connector.
b) Sufficiently loosen the screw that secures the CFL unit.
The screw is designed so that it cannot be removed, but if it does come
out for some reason and falls inside the PT, it must be extricated without
fail.
c) Shift the CFL unit to the right.
d) Pull out the CFL unit.
5. Fit a new CFL unit by following the procedure described below.
a) Slot the projection on the left end of the CFL unit into the hole in the fixture
inside the PT.
b) Engage the CFL unit with the fixture inside the PT.
Check that the CFL unit is in contact with the left end of the fixture and is
parallel with the fixture during this engagement.
c) Tighten the screw of the CFL unit to secure it.
The tightening torque is 0.2 N@m.
241
Section
Maintenance of the NT31/NT31C
7-3
d) Engage the connector of the CFL unit with the connector of the PT so that
the red cable is at the left side.
Insert the connector so that it clicks firmly into place.
Red cable
White cable
d
b
Fixture inside the
NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST
141-EV2
Backlight unit
6. Fit the cover and secure it with the screw.
7. Reconnect the wiring, cables, and units disconnected in 2, and tighten the
screws.
8. Before starting normal operation, confirm that the following tests can be
executed correctly by using the I/O check in the Maintenance menu. Also
perform a communication test with the host.
• Touch switch
• Backlight
9. On confirming that all the tests in 8 can be executed normally, start operation.
7-3-1 Replacing the Battery
The NT31/NT31C uses a lithium battery to back up the memory contents.
The battery life is about 5 years if the NT31/NT31C is used in a location where
the ambient temperature is 25C. If the temperature at the location of use is
higher than this, the battery life will be shorter. Change the battery at suitable
intervals in accordance with the operating environment of the NT31/NT31C.
It is advisable to keep a spare battery so that the battery can be replaced immediately when replacement becomes necessary.
Battery Type
3G2A9-BAT08 (for both NT31 and NT31C)
Guide to Replacement
Replace the battery in the following cases. The battery must be replaced within 5
days.
• When 5 years have passed since the installation of a new battery.
• When the RUN LED is lit in orange (during operation) or in red (when stopped).
• When the message The voltage is lowered. is displayed on switching on the
power or resetting the NT31/NT31C.
• When The voltage is lowered is displayed in the Battery check in the battery
check menu of the Maintenance mode.
Battery Replacement Method
Replace the battery by following the procedure given below.
To protect the contents of the memory, the battery must be replaced within 5 minutes.
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
242
1. Keep the power ON for at least 5 minutes and then turn it OFF.
Section
Inspection and Cleaning
7-4
Reference: Unless the power is kept ON for at least 5 minutes, the memory contents cannot
be retained for more than 5 minutes without a battery.
2. Insert a flat blade screwdriver at the top of the battery cover located at the left
of the rear face of the NT31/NT31C and pull it toward you.
3. Remove the battery that is secured under the battery cover, grip the cable,
and pull the connector straight out.
4. Insert the connector of the new battery into the connector on the
NT31/NT31C and fit the battery under the battery cover.
When inserting the battery connector, make sure that the projection on it
faces to the left, and press it fully home while keeping it straight.
The connector of the new battery must be connected within 5 minutes after
disconnecting the old battery’s connector. However, the battery can be replaced while the NT31/NT31C power is on, and in this case there is no time
restriction.
5. Close the battery cover, making sure that the cable is not trapped.
7-4
Inspection and Cleaning
Clean and inspect the NT31/NT31C regularly to ensure that it is always used in
its optimum condition.
Cleaning Method
If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see. Clean the screen from time to
time as follows.
• In daily cleaning, wipe the display with a soft dry cloth. If the soiling is particularly heavy, attempting to remove it by wiping with a dry cloth may damage the
front sheet of the unit. In this case, wipe with a damp cloth.
• If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth, wet the cloth with diluted neutral detergent (2%), wring it out well and wipe the display with it.
243
Section
Inspection and Cleaning
7-4
• If rubber or vinyl products, tape, etc., are left stuck to the display for long periods they will cause staining. If such items are stuck to the display, remove them
during cleaning.
Note Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners, or chemical dusters.
Inspection Method
Point
Inspected
In normal environments, inspect the NT31/NT31C at intervals of between 6
months and a year. In environments that are extremely hot and humid, or very
dusty environments, shorten the inspection interval.
Items Required for The Inspection
Prepare the following items before starting the inspection.
• Screwdrivers (Philips, flat head)
• Tester (or digital voltmeter)
• Industrial alcohol
• 100% cotton cloth
• Hygrometer (required in some cases)
• Thermometer (required in some cases)
• Synchroscope (required in some cases)
• Pen-writing oscilloscope (required in some cases)
Points Inspected
Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the
stated criteria. If there is, either improve the surrounding environment so that the
values fall within the stated range, or adjust the NT31/NT31C, for example by
re-tightening screws.
Inspection Details
Criterion
Power supply
voltage
Fluctuation in power supply terminal
voltage
Ambient
environmental
di i
conditions
Ambient temperature (temperature in the 0 to 50C
operation panel)
Thermometer
Ambient humidity (humidity in the
operation panel)
35% to 85% RH
Hygrometer
Presence/absence of dust
Dust must not be settled
Visual inspection
Looseness of mounting brackets, etc.
To be no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Connector connections of connecting
cable
To be fully inserted and locked, with
no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Looseness of screws in external wiring
To be no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Mounting
g
conditions
diti
Permissible voltage fluctuation range
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
(24 VDC –15%, +10%)
Inspection
Instrument
Conditions of external connecting cables Faults such as incipient disconnection
Components
with limited
lives
Brightness of the backlight
Note
244
Tester
Visual inspection
Must be sufficiently bright.
Visual inspection
Backlight life:
NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141EV2:
Brightness is halved after about
25,000 hours in use at medium
brightness, or about 10,000 hours in
use at high brightness.
NT31-ST122-EV2/NT31C-ST142EV2:
Brightness is halved after about
50,000 hours of use at high
brightness.
1. Do not disassemble for repairs or modification.
2. The disposal of the unit (including batteries to be disposed and backlight)
may be regulated by national or local authorities. Dispose of them in accor-
Section
Inspection and Cleaning
7-4
dance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority.
Reference: Desire on replacing the NT31/NT31C
When replacing the NT31/NT31C after discovering a fault during inspections,
note the following points:
Be sure to switch the power OFF before starting replacement.
After replacement, check that the new NT31/NT31C is not subject to the same
error.
If a faulty unit is returned for repairs, write as detailed a description of the fault
as possible and send this description together with the unit to the OMRON address indicated on the back cover of this book.
245
Appendix A
Specifications
General Specifications
Specification
Item
Rated power supply voltage
NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141-EV2
24 VDC
NT31-ST122-EV2/NT31C-ST142-EV2
Allowable power supply
voltage range
Allowable power
interruption time
Power consumption
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15% to +10%)
Operating ambient
temperature
Storage ambient
temperature
Operating ambient humidity
0 to +50C
Operating environment
No corrosive gases
Noise resistance
Common mode: 1000 Vp-p (between
power supply terminals and panel)
No regulation
15 W max.
–20 to +60C
35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Normal mode:
Conforms to IEC61000-4-4
2 kV (power line)
300 Vp-p
Pulse width of 100 ns to 1 µs, pulse rise
time of 1 ns
Vibration resistance
(operating)
Shock resistance
(operating)
Dimensions
Weight
Panel cutout dimensions
10 to 57 Hz with 0.075 mm amplitude
57 to 150 Hz with 1G {9.8 m/s2} acceleration for 30 minutes in each of X, Y, Z directions
147 m/s2 {15G}
3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
195 (W)
142 (H)
54 (D) mm
(With expansion unit mounted: 195 (W)
142 (H)
74 (D) mm)
1 kg max.
184 +0.5× 131 +0.5 mm
0
0
Circle of panel pressure 1.6 to 4.8 mm
Enclosure ratings
Front panel: Equivalent to IP65F (NEMA4)*
Grounding
D-type grounding (Ground to 100 Ω or less)
* The NT31/NT31C may not be used at a location where it is exposed to splashing oil for a long period.
247
Appendix A
Specifications
Performance Specifications
Display Specifications
Item
Specification
NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31C-ST141-EV2
Display device
Number of dots
(resolution)
320 dots horizontally
Size of a
standard
character
NT 31-ST121-EV2 : Height 5.76 mm, Width : 2.88 mm
NT 31C-ST141-EV2 : Height 5.76 mm, Width : 2.88 mm
Effective
display area
118.2 mm horizontally
NT31:
Display
panel
NT31-ST122-EV2/NT31C-ST142-EV2
NT31:
Monochrome STN LCD (with backlight)
NT31C: Color STN LCD (with backlight)
240 dots vertically
89.4 mm vertically (5.7 inches)
View angle
Up:
Down:
Left/right:
NT31C: Up:
Down:
Left/right:
20
30
"30
45
60
"50
NT31:
Up:
Down:
Left/right:
NT31C: Up:
Down:
Left/right:
20
40
"45
30
50
"50
Display color
NT31:
Black, white (2 colors)
NT31C: 8 colors (and intermediate colors can be displayed with tiling patterns)
Life expectancy
(until brightness 50,000 hours minimum
reduced by
half)
Backlight
g
( hi
(white
cold
cathode
tube)
Contrast
adjustment
dj t
t
Adjustable in 100 levels by operation at the touch panel
Life expectancy
At low or medium brightness : 25,000 hours
minimum
At high brightness : 50,000 hours minimum
At high brightness : 10,000 hours minimum
Replacement
Can be replaced from the rear
Brightness
adjustment
Adjustable in 3 levels by touch switch operation at the touch panel
Cannot be replaced by the user
Automatic
turn-off function
Can be set to turn off in 1 to 255 minutes, or to remain on
POWER (green
LED)
Lit while power is being supplied
Indicators
RUN
Lit in green : Running normally, Memory unit automatic transmission done
Flash in green : Memory unit automatic transmission being executed, memory unit
automatic transmission error
Lit in orange : Low battery voltage (during operation)
Flash in red : Low battery voltage (when NT31/NT31C is stopped)
*1: Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at normal temperature and humidity
248
Appendix A
Specifications
Panel Specifications
Item
Specification
Type :
Resistive type
Number of switches:
192 (16 horizontally
Maximum number that can be registered on one screen: 192
Touch panel
Cell size:
NT31/NT31C 6.3
Input:
Pressure-sensitive type
12 vertically)
6.3 mm
Operating force: 1 N minimum
Life expectancy: One million operations minimum
External Interface Specifications
Item
Specification
Serial port A
Conforms to EIA RS-232C
D-SUB 9-pin connector (female)
+5 V (250 mA max.) output at pin No. 6
Serial port B
EIA RS-232C or RS-422A/485 (selectable, by memory switch setting)
D-SUB 25-pin connector (female)
Serial communication
Parallel interface
Conforms to Centronics standard, 20-pin half pitch connector
Expansion interface
Dedicated connector
Note Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 250 mA before using the +5 V
output of pin No. 6. The +5 V output of the unit delivers +5 V " 5% and 250 mA maximum.
Programming Environment
Item
Specification
Programming System
Programming support software
Programming Tool
Programming support software: NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.0), by OMRON
Special Features
Item
Specifications
Buzzer
Three kinds of buzzer sound (continuous, short intermittent, and long intermittent)
ON:
On reception of a command from the host, display of a screen with a
buzzer setting, or display of an error screen such as for a receive error.
OFF:
On reception of a command from the host, or display of a screen with
no buzzer setting.
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Buzzer Sound” in the memory switch menu, or set
“ERROR ON” for the buzzer to sound only when an error occurs.
The buzzer sounds three times in response to prohibited input.
Touch switch input sound
Touch switches
Input sound: Sounding for 0.2 seconds
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Key Press Sound” in the memory switch menu.
Maintenance function
- Memory switch setting
- Self-test functions, such as for the memory and external interface
- Setting condition confirmation function
- Communication check function
- Initialization of internal memory data
- Display of display/alarm history data
- Registered data test display function
249
Appendix A
Specifications
Item
Specifications
Battery backup
- Backup of numeral/character string memory table data in the NT31/NT31C
- Backup of display/alarm history data
- Backup of calendar and clock setting
Battery life:
5 years (at 25C)
When voltage becomes low: RUN LED lights in orange or red
The communication flag to the PLC (BAT LOW) comes
ON (1).
Resume function
Retains the contents of the numeral/character string memory tables (i.e., they are not
initialized) when the power is turned ON, when the NT31/NT31C is reset, and when
the operation mode is changed.
Setting:
Set “ON” for “Resume Function” in the memory switch menu.
Screen print function
Functions: - Prints a hard copy of the screen display
- Prints display/alarm histories
Setting:
Set the printing protocol (“Print Controller”) and printing type (“Print
Method”) in the memory switch menu.
“ESC/P”, “Color”:
Color printing conforming to ESC/P 24-J83C
“PC-PR201H”, “Color”: Color printing conforming to PC-PR201PL
“ESC/P”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to ESC/P 24-J82
“PC-PR201H”, “Tone”: Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PC-PR201PL
“PCL 5”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PCL 5
However, the NT31 supports monochrome printing only.
Calendar and clock function
- Displays the current time in accordance with the built-in clock
- Displayed and set with “Calendar Check” in the “MAINTENANCE MODE” menu
Programming Console function
Executes functions equivalent to those of al C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
for CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1 (-EV1 only), CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, and SRM1 (C02-V2 only) PLCs.
Executes functions as a Programming Console for CS1 series PLC.
Device Monitor function
The Device Monitor function can be used to change the PLC’s operating mode,
read/change words in the PLC’s data areas, and display the PLC’s error log.
Compatible PLCs include the CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1, and CS-series PLCs.
Mathematical function
Up to 256 calculation expressions can be registered along with the screen data. The
calculation function reads the required data from numeral memory tables or host
words, executes the registered calculations, and writes the results.
Arithmetic operators, logic operators, bit operators, and comparative operators can
be used.
Transmission
functions
250
System program
transmission
Downloads the system program from the system installer
Downloads/Upload the system program with a memory unit.
Screen data
transmission
- Function for downloading screen data to and uploading screen data from the
Support Tool
- Function for transmitting screen data to and from the memory unit.
History data
uploading
Function for uploading display/alarm history data from PT.
Appendix A
Specifications
Communications Specifications
For a Host Link , RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
9600, 19200 bps
7 bits
2 bits
Even
Communications protocol
C-series SYSMAC WAY (1:N)
* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable: Max. 2 m
• RS-422A cable: Total length 500 m max.
For a Host Link , RS-422A Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Connector
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
Communications protocol
C-series SYSWAY (1:N)
9600, 19200 bps
7 bits
2 bits
Even
For an NT Link , 1:1, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable: Max. 2 m
• RS-422A cable: Total length 500 m max.
251
Appendix A
Specifications
For an NT Link , 1:1, RS-422A Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Connector
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
For an NT Link , 1:N, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 units are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:
Max. 2 m
• RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m max.
For an NT Link , 1:N, RS-422A/485 Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A/485
Connector
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
For a High-speed NT Link , 1:N, RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 units are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:
Max. 2 m
• RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m max.
For a High-speed NT Link , 1:N, RS-422A/485 Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A/485
Connector
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
252
Appendix A
Specifications
For a Memory Link , RS-232C Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Response:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
Communications protocol
Memory link
* When using NT-AL001, specification is as follows:
• RS-232C: Max. 2 m
• RS-422A: Max. total length 500 m
For a Memory Link , RS-422A Type
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-422A
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Response:
Connector
25-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port B)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m*
Communications protocol
Memory link
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
None, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence
For a Bar Code Reader
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m
Communications protocol
Non-protocol mode
Data format
[STX]
4,800, 9600, 19200 bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
RS/CS
Data (0 to 40 bytes)
[ETX]
253
Appendix B
Dimensions
Body
183.5 (7.22)
POWER
RUN
142 (5.59)
130.5 (5.14)
5 (0.20)
195 (7.68)
Units: mm (inch)
54 (2.13)
With memory unit installed
(NT-MF261)
74 (2.91)
255
Appendix B
Dimensions
Mounting Dimensions
Mounting panel
Mounting fixture
POWER
RUN
25 (0.98)
153 (6.02)
15.5 (0.61)
145 (5.71)
5 (0.2)
34 (1.34) (min.)
38 (1.5) (max.)
Units: mm (inch)
206 (8.11)
256
Appendix B
Dimensions
Cable Connection Dimensions (with NT-MF261)
96 (3.78)
10.2 (0.47)
91 (3.58)
24V
DC
26.7 (1.05)
PRINTER
PORT B
PORT A
5 (0.20)
50 (1.97)
60 (2.36)
Units: mm (inch)
257
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
This section outlines the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and specifications of an
RS-232C/RS-422A convertor unit (NT-AL001-E). Refer to this information when designing the control panel. For
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT-AL001-E.
Dimensions
53.5
(2.11)
110 (4.33)
om Ron
4 (0.16)
74.5 (2.93)
100.2 (3.94)
105 (4.13) max.
NT–AL001-E
(30)
(1.18)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18)
Units: mm (inch)
30 (W)
114 (H)
100.2 (D) mm:
with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W)
114 (H)
119.5 (D) mm:
with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
Methods for Mounting and Removal
The RS-232/RS-422 convertor unit (NT-AL001-E) can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel.
The RS-422A terminal block of the convertor unit can be easily removed.
Mounting to a DIN Rail
Latch the top part of the rear face of the convertor unit (a in the figure) onto the top edge of the DIN rail, and push the
unit in the direction indicated by b in the figure.
Now fit end plates at the right and left of the convertor unit to secure it and ensure that it cannot shift laterally.
(a)
(b)
259
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Removal from a DIN Rail
Remove the end plates at right and left of the convertor unit and, as shown in the figure below, insert a flat blade
screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the convertor unit and prize it free.
Mounting to an Operation Panel
Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) and secure the
convertor unit with screws.
30
(1.18)
100
(3.94)
110
(4.33)
21
(0.83)
2-M4
Units: mm (inch)
Note In order to ensure a secure and strong mount, mount the convertor unit in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch).
260
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Specifications
The general specifications and communications specifications of the convertor unit are shown below.
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Dimensions
30 (W)
30 (W)
114 (H)
114 (H)
100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
Weight
200 g max.
Operating ambient temperature
0 to 55C
Operating ambient humidity
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Rated power supply voltage
+5 V " 10% (using pin No. 6 of the RS-232C connector)
Rated power supply current
150 mA max.
Rush current
0.8 A max.
Insulation resistance
20 MΩ or higher, measured between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively
and functional ground terminal with a 500 VDC megger
Dielectric strength
1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and
functional ground terminal
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
Operating environment
No corrosive gases
Storage ambient temperature
−20 to +75C
Vibration resistance
Conforms to JIS C0911 60 minutes in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance
Conforms to JIS C0912 47m/s2, 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Communications Specifications
RS-232C Interface
Item
Specification
Communications speed
Max. 115.2k bps
Transmission distance
Max. 2 m
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
RS-422A/485 Interface
Item
Specification
Communications speed
Max. 115.2k bps (depends on the RS-232C communications speed)
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
Connector
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0
261
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
DIP Switch Settings
The convertor unit has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS-422A/485 communication conditions.
Before connecting the cable to the convertor unit, make the DIP switch settings.
(Factory settings)
ON
123456
omR on
NT–AL001-E
[SW1-1] Not used (always ON)
[SW1-2] Setting for built-in terminal resistance
- OFF Terminator not set
- ON Terminator set
[SW1-3, 4] Selection of 2-wire type/4-wire type
SW1-3
SW1-4
OFF
2-wire type (RS-485)
ON
SW1-3
SW1-4
OFF
4-wire type (RS-422A)
ON
[SW1-5, 6] Selection of the RS-422A send mode
SW1-5
SW1-6
OFF
Continual sending
ON
SW1-5
OFF
ON
SW1-6
SW1-5
OFF
ON
SW1-6
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS high)
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS low)
When using the host link or 1:1 NT Link, set the RS-422A send mode to continual sending (set both SW1-5 and 6
OFF).
When using the 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed), set the RS-422A send mode to complies with CS control of
RS-232C (i.e., one of SW1-5 and SW1-6 must be ON).
Note 1. Do not set both SW1-5 and SW1-6 ON at the same time. This may damage internal circuits.
2. The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work.
3. Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning on the power to an RS-232C device such as a PT
(i.e., turning on the power to the convertor unit), check that the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP
switch settings are correct. If the power is turned on while there is a wiring fault, the internal circuits of the
convertor unit or the RS-232C device may be damaged.
4. When the convertor unit is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), CQM1H, CS1G/H model of OMRON
PLC as an RS-422A device, set DIP switches SW1-5 and SW1-6 as indicated below.
SW1-5
OFF
5 6
262
SW1-6
ON
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Pin Arrangement
The convertor unit has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a connector for an RS-232C
interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector are as follows.
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
Terminal
block pin
No.
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction
(convertor unit ⇔ RS-422
device)
CSA
→
8
Request to send (−)
7
Request to send (+)
CSB
→
6
Receive data (−)
RDA
←
5
Receive data (+)
RDB
←
4
Send data (−)
SDA
→
3
Send data (+)
SDB
→
2
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
1
Functional ground
* The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications.
–
RS-232C Connector
Connector
pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction
(convertor unit ⇔ RS-232C
device)
6
1
Not used
–
–
7
2
Send data
SD
←
8
3
Receive data
RD
→
4
Request to send
(shorted to CS internally)
RS
←
5
Clear to send
(shorted to RS internally)
CS
→
6
+5 V (150 mA) input for convertor
unit
+5 V
→
7
Data set ready
(shorted to ER internally)
DR
→
8
Data terminal ready
(shorted to DR internally)
ER
←
9
9
Signal ground
SG
* The hood is connected to the functional ground terminal of the RS-422A terminal block.
–
263
Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Block Diagram
A diagram showing the internal blocks of the convertor unit is shown below. Refer to this diagram when making
cables yourself, or when connecting devices with special interfaces.
RS-232C side
D-SUB 9P CASE
+5 V
SG
6 Fuse
R
POWER
LED
DC-DC Convertor
L
9
Photocoupler
RS-232C
Dr/Rec
RD
SD
RS
CS
DR
ER
264
3
2
RS-422A/485 side
8P terminal block
RS-422A/485 Dr/Rec
R
R
L
REG
IS_5 V
1
IS_0 V
2
SG
3
4
SDB
SDA
R
2-wire type/
4-wire type
SW1-6
SW1-3
R
7
8
SW1-4
SW1-5
4
5
FG
Terminator
R
5
RDB
6
RDA
7
8
CSB
CSA
SW1-2
RS-422A Dr
Appendix D
Transporting and Storing the NT31/NT31C
• When transporting the NT31/NT31C, use the packaging intended for it.
• When storing the NT31/NT31C, observe the following conditions.
Storage ambient temperature:
Storage ambient humidity:
–20 to +60C
35% to 85%
265
Appendix E
Making the Cable
The procedure for making up the cable is described below.
Also refer to this procedure for making a connecting cable for use with RS-422A/485 type connections.
Cable Preparation
The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG.
Cable with Shielding Wire Connected to FG
1, 2, 3...
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the
shielding underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
5. Fold back the shielding wire.
6. Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded-back shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)
10
(0.39)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
(6)
Units: mm (inch)
Aluminum foil tape
Cable with Shielding Wire Not Connected to FG
1, 2, 3...
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the
shielding underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
267
Appendix E
Making the Cable
5. Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
Units: mm (inch)
Vinyl tape
Soldering
1, 2, 3...
1. Slide heat-shrink tube over each wire.
2. Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.
3. Solder each wire to each connector terminal.
1 mm
Soldering iron
Heat-shrink tube
(F, 1.5 mm dia., ȏ = 10 mm)
4. Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrink tube
Hood Assembly
Assemble the connector hood as shown below.
Aluminum foil tape
End connected to FG
268
End not connected to FG
Appendix F
Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC
Refer to the following when making a cable for connecting the Support Tool.
Assembly of Connecting Cables
Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways, depending on the type of RS-232C connector.
25-pin Connector
Personal computer
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
SG
7
9
SG
FG
1
Connector for peripheral devices on PT
Shielding wire
Connector hood
Connector hood
Note Please connect the shielding wire to the connector hood at both the personal computer and the peripheral
device connector on the PT.
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Model
Connector
Connector hood
Cable
Remarks
XM2D-2501
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side
XM2A-0901
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side
XM2S-2511
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side
XM2S-0911
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
9-pin Connector
Personal computer
RD
2
2
SD
SD
3
3
RD
RS
7
4
RS
CS
8
5
CS
SG
5
9
SG
Connector for peripheral devices on PT
Shielding wire
Connector hood
Connector hood
Note Please connect the shielding wire to the connector hood at both the personal computer and the peripheral
device connector on the PT.
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Connector hood*
Cable
Model
Remarks
XM2D-0901
9-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer
XM2A-0901
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT
XM2S-0911
9-pin, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0913
9-pin, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
* One XM2S-0911 (for PT) and either one XM2S-0911 or -0913 (for your personal computer) are needed.
269
Appendix G
Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar
Code Reader
Refer to the following when making the cable for connection to a bar code reader.
Wiring Method
NT31/NT31C side
Bar code reader side
Abbr.
Abbr.
RS-232C
interface
Pin No.
1
SD
SD
2
RD
RD
3
RS
RS
4
CS
CS
5
+5 V
SG
6
ER
7
SG
8
+5 V
9
When using the +5 V output of the NT31/NT31C, limit the cable length to within 2 m. If a cable longer than 2 m is
used, connect an external power supply to the bar code reader.
Connector and Related Parts
Use the parts which are specified by bar code reader and following recommended products when making the
connecting cable.
Name
Model
Remarks
Connector
XM2A-0901
9-pin type, made by OMRON, PT side
Connector hood
XM2S-0911
9-pin, made by OMRON
Cable
AWG28
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
5P IFVV-SB
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P
28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
271
Appendix H
Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer
The following product is recommended as the cable for connecting a printer.
NT-CNT121 (made by OMRON, cable length 1.5 m, 20-pin – 36-pin)
Refer to the following when making a cable for connection to a printer.
• Connector pin arrangement and wiring
Connector for a printer
on PT side
11
2
0
1
1
0
Printer
side
Abbr.
Pin No.
Connector hood
Shielding wire
Pin No.
Connector hood
1
8
3
6
20
0V
1
D7
11
9
N.C.
2
N.C.
D6
12
8
D5
3
7
0V
13
21
D4
4
6
N.C
14
N.C.
D3
5
5
0V
15
22
0V
6
23
D2
16
4
N.C.
7
N.C.
D1
17
3
D0
8
2
0V
18
24
STROB
9
1
N.C.
19
N.C.
BUSY
10
11
0V
20
19
1
1
9
273
Appendix I
Relationship between System Program and
Hardware
Here, relationship between system program and hardware is described.
NT31/NT31C have following models.
NT31-ST121-E
Conventional product
p
NT31C-ST141-E
NT31-ST121-EV1
NT31C-ST141-EV1
NT31-ST121-EV2
Version upgrade
pg
model of the products
p
above
(12/98)
Version upgrade
pg
model of the products
p
above
NT31C-ST141-EV2
NT31-ST122-EV2
NT31C-ST142-EV2
System programs indicated below are installed for the models shown above in the default state. Also, system programs are supplied with the Support Tool as follows.
• System programs for NT31-ST121-E/NT31C-ST141-E: System Program Ver. 1.0
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJ3AT1-EV2/ZJCAT1-EV2)
• System programs for NT31-ST121-EV1/NT31C-ST141-EV1: System Program Ver. 2.0 or 2.1
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJ3AT1-EV3/ZJCAT1-EV3)
• System programs for NT31-ST121/122-EV2 and NT31C-ST141/142-EV2: System Program Ver. 3.0
(System programs supplied with NT-ZJCAT1-EV4)
(A system program for the earlier NT30/620 PTs is also included with the NT-ZJCAT1-EV4.)
These system programs have mutual compatibility, therefore, they can be installed and used for NT31-ST121-E/
NT31C-ST141-E/NT31-ST121-EV1/NT31C-ST141-EV1/NT31-ST121-EV2/NT31-ST122-EV2/
NT31C-ST141-EV2/NT31C-ST142-EV2 each.
However, there will be a limitation on function depending on the combination. Refer to the following table.
Limitations of System Program/PT Combinations
The following table shows only the relationship between the hardware and system program.
For details of the relationship with the screen data created using the Support Tool, refer to NT-series Support Tool
for Windows (Ver. 4.1) Operation Manual (V061-E1-).
275
Appendix I
Relationship between System Program and Hardware
Combining a -V1 Version and Version without a -V Suffix
Hardware
System program Ver. 1.0
NT31-ST121-E
NT31-ST121-EV1
NT31C-ST141-E
NT31C-ST141-EV1
The following functions cannot be used
The following functions cannot be used
Analogue meter
Analogue meter
High-definition font display
High-definition font display
Installation of system programs using memory unit
Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
Memory link
Memory link
Window control from the host
Window control from the host
Multiple display of window screens
Multiple display of window screens
Moving a window
Moving a window
Refer to the following table for details on new
functions supported by the -V2 versions.
Refer to the following table for details on new
functions supported by the -V2 versions.
System program Ver. 2.0 or Ver. 2.1
* Installation of system programs using memory unit
is possible
The following functions cannot be used
Installation of system programs using memory unit
The new functions supported by the -V2 versions
cannot be used. Refer to the following table for details.
High-definition font display
Refer to the following table for details on new
functions supported by the -V2 versions.
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.
Combining a -V1 Version and -V2 Version
Hardware
System program Ver. 2.0 or Ver. 2.1
NT31-ST121-EV1
NT31-ST121/122-EV2
NT31C-ST141-EV1
NT31C-ST141/142-EV2
The following functions (new functions supported by the -V2) cannot be used:
Additional data areas accessible in CS-series PLCs
The CS-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
Interlock function that controls touch switches, numeral inputs, and character string inputs
Mathematical function
Device Monitor function
NT30/620 compatible mode
Expanded capabilities for label (guide character) displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF switching
displays, numeral memory table displays, and character string memory table displays
System program Ver. 3.0
All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and Reference Manual can be used.
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.
276
Appendix I
Relationship between System Program and Hardware
Combining a -V2 Version and Version without a -V Suffix
Hardware
System program Ver. 1.0
NT31-ST121-E
NT31-ST121/122-EV2
NT31C-ST141-E
NT31C-ST141/142-EV2
The following functions cannot be used
The following functions cannot be used
Analogue meter
Analogue meter
High-definition font display
High-definition font display
Installation of system programs using memory unit
Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
Memory link
Memory link
Window control from the host
Window control from the host
Multiple display of window screens
Multiple display of window screens
Moving a window
Moving a window
Additional data areas accessible in CS-series PLCs
Additional data areas accessible in CS-series PLCs
The CS-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
The CS-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
Interlock function that controls touch switches,
numeral inputs, and character string inputs
Interlock function that controls touch switches,
numeral inputs, and character string inputs
Device Monitor function
Device Monitor function
NT30/620 compatible mode
NT30/620 compatible mode
Expanded capabilities for label (guide character)
displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF
switching displays, numeral memory table displays,
and character string memory table displays
Expanded capabilities for label (guide character)
displays, including multiple lines of text, ON/OFF
switching displays, numeral memory table displays,
and character string memory table displays
System program Ver. 3.0
Mathematical function
Mathematical function
The following functions cannot be used
Installation of system programs using memory unit
* Installation of system programs using memory unit
is possible
All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and
Reference Manual can be used.
High-definition font display
* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.
277
Appendix J
Model List
PTs
Model
Specification
NT31-ST121-EV2
STN monochrome display, beige
NT31-ST121B-EV2
STN monochrome display, black
NT31-ST122-EV2
STN monochrome display, beige
NT31-ST122B-EV2
STN monochrome display, black
NT31C-ST141-EV2
STN color display, beige
NT31C-ST141B-EV2
STN color display, black
NT31C-ST142-EV2
STN color display, beige
NT31C-ST142B-EV2
STN color display, black
Host Link Units
Model
Specification
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CPU-mounted type with RS-232C connector
3G2A6-LK202-EV1
CPU-mounted type with RS-422A connector
C200H-LK201-V1
Rack-mounting unit with RS-232C connector for C200H
C200H-LK202-V1
Rack-mounting unit with RS-422A connector for C200H
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Features a selectable RS-232C/RS-422A connector
C500-LK203
Rack-mounting unit for C500
CV500-LK201
Features an RS-232C connector and a selectable
RS-232C/RS-422A connector
Rack-mounting unit for CVM1/CV
Applicable PLC
C-series
C1000H
C2000H
C-series
C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
C-series
C1000H
C2000H
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit
Model
SRM1-C02-V2
Specification
Features an RS-232C port
Model Name
SRM1
Communications Unit
Model
CS1W-SCU21
Specification
RS-232C (2 ports)
Rack-mounting unit
Applicable PLC
CS-series
CS1G/H
279
Appendix J
Model List
CPU Units for Connection via a Host Link
Model
Specification
PLC Type
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1A-10CD-
CPM1A-20CD-
CPM1A-30CD-
CPM1A-40CD-
RS-232C adapter/RS-422A adapter connected to the
peripheral port
C-series
CPM1
CPM2A-30CD-
CPM2A-40CD-
CPM2A-60CD-
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CPM2A
CPM2C-10-
CPM2C-20-
The PLC’s communications connector can be split into C-series
an RS-232C port and peripheral port with a
CPM2C
CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable. (The
CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cables convert the
connector to a single RS-232C or peripheral port.)
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
(The CQM1H-CPU11-E has only a peripheral port.)
C-series
CQM1H
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HS
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HG(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX(-Z)E
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin) CS-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin) CS-series
CS1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
* Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.
280
Appendix J
Model List
CPU Units for Connection via a 1:1 NT Link
Model
Specification
PLC Type
CPM1-10CDR-
CPM1-20CDR-
CPM1A-10CD-
CPM1A-20CD-
CPM1A-30CD-
CPM1A-40CD-
RS-232C adapter connected to the peripheral port
(RS-422A adapter cannot be used)
C-series
CPM1
CPM2A-30CD-
CPM2A-40CD-
CPM2A-60CD-
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CPM2A
CPM2C-10-
CPM2C-20-
Connect to the RS-232C port of a CPM2C-CN111
Connecting Cable.
C-series
CPM2C
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1H
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HS
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HG(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX(-Z)E
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
* Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.
CPU Units for Connection via a 1:N NT Link
Model
Specification
PLC Type
CQM1H-CPU51(*1)
CQM1H-CPU61(*1)
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1H
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU34-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HG(-Z)E
281
Appendix J
Model List
Model
Specification
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX(-Z)E
PLC Type
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS-series
CS1H
*1: A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
*2: Either of the communication boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.
CPU Units for Connection via a High-speed NT Link (1:N))
Model
Specification
PLC Type
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
CS-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
CS-series
CS1H
Reference: Serial Communications Boards (CS1W-SCB41) and Serial Communications Units (CS1W-SCU21)
with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and Units
with earlier lot numbers cannot be used to establish a high-speed 1:N NT Link.
RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Model
NT-AL001
Specification
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block
RS-232C Adaptor, RS-422A Adaptor
Model
Specification
CPM1-CIF01
Links the RS-232C port of an NT31/NT31C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,
CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (compatible with host link, and NT Link (1:1))
CPM1-CIF11
Links the RS-422A port of an NT31/NT31C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,
CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (compatible with host link)
282
Appendix J
Model List
Related Parts and Equipment for PT
Name
Model
Remark
Support Tool*
Options
p
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
Compatible with PC/AT personal computers
For Windows 95/98/NT (English version)
CD-ROM
NT31C-CFL01
Replaceable backlight (common to NT31 and NT31C)
NT30-KBA04
Reflection suppressing protective sheet for NT31/NT31C
NT30-KBA01
Chemical-resistant cover for NT31/NT31C
NT-MF261
Memory unit for NT31/NT31C
3G2A9-BAT08
Spare battery
* The Support Tool indicated above includes the system installer and the standard system programs (Ver. 3.0) for the
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. System programs for the earlier NT30/620 PTs are also included.
Cables with Connectors for PT ↔ PLC/NT-AL001-E
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
XW2Z-200T
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
XW2Z-200P
2m
XW2Z-500P
5m
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
XW2Z-070T-1
0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1
2m
Applicable units
Communication Method
Specification
Host link units with a 25-pin
p
connector
Serial p
port A host link
(RS-232C only)
9 pin ↔ 25-pin
9-pin
25 pin
Host link units with a 9-pin
p
connector
t
Serial port
p A host link,, NT Link
(1:1) (RS-232C only)
9 pin ↔ 9-pin
9-pin
9 pin
Host link units with a 25-pin
p
connector
Serial p
port B host link
(RS-232C only)
25 pin ↔ 25-pin
25-pin
25 pin
Host link units with a 9-pin
p
connector
Serial port
p B host link,, NT Link
(1:1) (RS-232C only)
25 pin ↔ 9
25-pin
9-pin
pin
CPU Units with a 9-pin
connector (The PLC((*1))
supplies +5 V for NT-AL001-E
connections.)
Host Link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N
NT Link using NT-AL001-E
NT AL001 E
9 pin ↔ 9-pin
9 pin
9-pin
*1: The following PLCs can supply +5 V: C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, CPM2A, CPM2C, and CS1G/H.
Cables with Connectors
Model
Cable Length
CV500-CN228
2m
XW2Z-S001*
15 cm
Specification
25-pin (male) ↔ 9-pin (male)
25-pin (female) ↔ 14-pin (male)
XW2Z-S002
2m
9-pin (female) ↔ 9-pin (male)
* The XW2Z-S001 is a converting cable. A CV500-CN228 must be purchased separately for connection to a computer.
Connection Cable
Model
AWG28
Specification
5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P
28AWG
Multicore cable, manufactured by Fujikura, Ltd.
Multicore cable, manufactured by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
Applicable Connectors
Name
Connector
Model
Specification
XM2A-2501
25-pin type (male), made by OMRON
XM2D-2501
25-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)
XM2A-0901
9-pin type (male), made by OMRON
XM2D-0901
9-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)
DB-25P
25-pin type (male), made by JAE
283
Appendix J
Model List
Connector hood
XM2S-2511
25-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-2513
25-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0911
9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0911-E
9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0913
9-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
DB-C2-J9
25-pin type, made by JAE
Printer Cable
Model
NT-CNT121
Specification
Printer cable for half pitch (1.5 m), made by OMRON
Cable for Peripheral Port of CS-series PLC
Model
CS1W-CN118
Specification
Made by OMRON (CS-series peripheral port ↔ D-Sub, 9-pin, female)
Connecting Cable for the CPM2C Communications Connector
Model
CPM2C-CN111
284
Specification
Made by OMRON (CPM2C communications port ↔ D-Sub, 9-pin, female, C-series
peripheral port)
Appendix K
Option List
Replaceable Backlight ... NT31C-CFL01 (Used for NT31-ST121-EV2,
NT31C-ST141-EV2 Only)
This is a backlight (CFL unit) for replacement purposes.
Protective Sheet ... NT30-KBA04 (Used for Both NT31/NT31C)
Stuck to the display to prevent irregular reflection or contamination. The entire sheet is colorless and transparent.
The five sheets make a set.
285
Appendix K
Option List
Chemical-resistant Cover ... NT30-KBA01
Covers the front panel and protects it from various chemical agents. The entire sheet is milky white and made of
silicone rubber.
The sheet offers protection against the following chemical agents.
Protects against
Does not protect against
Boric acid
Hexane
Sulfuric acid
Lubricating oil
Nitrogen
Benzene
Ammonia gas
Butane
Carbonic acid gas
Carbonic acid
Phenol
Chlorinated solvents
Glycerin
Napthalene
Ammonia water
Soy bean oil
Calcium chloride
Toluene
Developing fluid (hypo)
Acetaldehyde
Lard
For information on chemical agents not listed in the table above, please inquire whether or not protection is offered
(if the chemical agent is one against which silicone rubber is recognized as offering protection, please use this
product even if the agent is not listed in the “Protects against” column of the table above).
Replacement Battery ... 3G2A9-BAT08
This is a lithium battery used for memory backup.
286
Option List
Appendix K
Memory Unit ... NT-MF261
This is a dedicated unit for reading/writing the screen data and the system programs in an NT31/NT31C. Data is
transmitted by DIP switch setting at the memory unit.
287
Index
Numbers
Chemical–resistant cover, 286
Cleaning method, 243
1:N connection among RS–422A ports, 120
Clearing screen data, 138, 152
1:N connection among RS–485 ports, 123
Clearing/installing the system program, 149
1:N connection between RS–422A/485 at the NT31/NT31C
and RS–232C at the host, 90
Comm. A Method, 156
Comm. B Method, 156
Comm. B Select, 156
A
Allowable power supply voltage range, 247
Applicable connectors, 283
Automatic transmission (memory unit), 40, 47
B
Communication board, 53, 66, 70, 74, 100
Communication boards, 109
Communication by Using Memory Link, 19
Communication condition, 155
Communication condition settings for bar code readers, 186
Communication condition settings for the host link method,
156
Communication errors and their remedies, 237
Backlight, 239
Communication method for communications with the host, 155
Backlight brightness adjustment, 191
Communication method settings, 156
Backlight unit, 28
Communication methods, 24
Battery cover, 28
Communication port, 24
Before operating, 21
Communication type, 24
Brightness adjustment, 248
Communication Unit, 279
Communications specifications, 251
C
Comparison between NT31 and NT31C, 5
Connecting a bar code reader, 35
Cable connection dimensions, 257
Connecting a printer, 34
Cable for peripheral port of CS1–series PLC, 284
Connecting directly between RS–232C ports, 77
Cables with connectors, 283
Connecting to other model PLCs, 19
Calling the System Installer mode, 136
Connecting to the Support Tool, 33
Calling the System Menu, 136
Connection cable, 283
Cell size (Touch panel), 249
Connection method, 24
Changing the system settings, 151
Contrast adjustment, 189
Checking communication at serial ports, 215
CPU, 100
Checking communication with a printer, 218
CPUs, 66, 70, 74, 109, 111
Checking communication with the support tool, 214
CPUs (for connection via a host link), 280
Checking interfaces, 213
CPUs connectable with host link units or expansion communication board, 100
Checking screen data, 200
Checking the backlight, 207
Checking the battery voltage, 212
D
Checking the buzzer, 203
Device check, 203
Checking the LCD (screen display), 206
Device Monitor function, 225
Checking the PT setting status, 195
Dimensions, 247
Checking the RUN LED, 204
Direct connection function, 16
Checking touch switches, 210
Disabling/enabling System Menu display, 151
289
Index
Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory, 151
Installation environment, 30
Display, 27
Installation in the operation panel, 30
Display color, 248
Display device, 248
Display specifications, 248
Displaying and printing the display history record, 196
L–M
Life expectancy (backlight), 248
Life expectancy (display panel), 248
Displaying/setting the calendar and clock, 193
Life expectancy (touch panel), 249
Downloading the system program, 150
Maintenance Mode, 134
Making the cable, 267
E
Making the cable for connecting a PLC, 269
Making the cable for connection to a bar code reader, 271
Effective display area, 248
Making the cable for connection to a printer, 273
Enclosure ratings, 247
Manual transmission (memory unit), 42, 48
Error messages, 233
Manuals, 21
Errors in the system installer mode and their remedies, 237
Memory initialization, 138
Errors occurring at start of operation, 233
Errors occurring during operation, 235
Errors occurring on screen data initialization and transmission,
236
Errors when using a memory unit, 43, 49
Expansion interface connector, 28
Expansion Mode, 134
External interface specifications, 249
F–H
Memory link method, 76, 114
Memory switch, 155
Memory switch setting screen, 166
Memory unit, 287
Menu tree, 135
RUN mode, 133
System Installer Mode, 133
Mounting dimensions, 256
N
Noise resistance, 247
Functional ground terminal, 32
NT link, 17
General specifications, 247
NT link (1:1) method, 65
GR terminal, 28
NT link (1:N) method, 70, 111
high-speed, 73, 113
Grounding, 32, 247
Host link, 17
Host link method, 52, 99
NT–AL001, 259
Number of dots, 248
Number of switches (touch panel), 249
Host link unit, 53, 279
I
O
Operating ambient humidity, 247
I/O settings, 189
Operating ambient temperature, 247
In the panel, 4
Operating environment, 247
Initializing alarm history record data, 142
Initializing display history record data, 140
Initializing the memory switches, 147
Initializing the memory tables, 145
Initializing the recipe tables, 143
Inspection method, 244
290
Operating force, 249
Operation at startup, 132
Operation modes, 133
P
Peripheral devices that can be connected, 15
Index
Power consumption, 247
Setting “Screen Saver Movement”, 173
Power input terminals, 28
Setting the automatic reset function, 181
POWER LED, 27
Setting the bar code reader input function, 186
Power supply connection, 31
Setting the ”Buzzer Sound”, 169
precautions, xi
Setting the communication type for serial port B, 165
Precautions to be observed when transmitting screen data, 154
Principal functions of NT31/NT31C, 8
Setting the conditions for communications with the memory
link method, 156
Printer cable, 284
Setting the display language in the System Installer mode, 149
Printer connector, 28
Setting the history display method, 177
Programming console function, 219
Setting the host link method, 158
Programming environment, 249
Setting the “Key Press Sound”, 168
Protective sheet, 285
Setting the Memory Link Method, 163
PT, 279
Setting the NT link (1:1) method, 160
PT Memory, 19
Setting the NT link (1:N) method, 161
Setting the “Print Method”, 172
R
Rated power supply voltage, 247
Recipe function, 6
Recommended printers, 34
Setting the “Printer Controller”, 170
Setting the resume function, 179
Setting the retry count, 184
Setting the screen saver start–up time, 175
Relationship between system program and hardware, 275
Setting the ”Start–up Wait Time”, 167
Relationships among modes, 133
Setting the terminal resistance, 97, 126
Replaceable backlight, 285
Setting the time–out interval, 183
Replacement battery, 286
Shock resistance (operating), 247
Replacing the backlight, 240
Special features, 249
Replacing the battery, 242
Starting operation, 166
Reset switch, 28
Starting the NT31/NT31C, 132
RS–232C adaptor, 282
Storage ambient temperature, 247
RS–232C/RS–422A convertor unit, 86, 282
Supplemental functions to V2, 5
RS–422A adaptor, 282
Support Tool, 283
RUN, 133
Switching from the System Menu to the RUN mode, 137
RUN LED, 27
Switching to the RUN mode, 166
System configuration, 15
S
System Menu, 133
Screen data composition and transmission units, 153
Screen data memory check, 207
T–U
Selecting menu items, 137
Serial communication board, 52, 70, 74, 99, 114
Terminal resistance setting terminal , 97
Serial communication unit, 52
Transmit Mode, 134
Serial port A, 16, 24
Transmitting the screen data, 153
Serial port A connector, 28
Transporting and storing the NT31/NT31C, 265
Serial port B, 16, 24
Usable systems (programming console function), 219
Serial port B connector, 28
Using a Memory Unit(NT31/NT31C with V1), 37
Set, 159
Using an RS–232C/RS–422A convertor unit, 259
291
Index
V
W
Warning label, 28
Vibration resistance (operating), 247
View angle, 248
292
Waterproofed, 4
Weight, 247
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. V062-E1-03
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
1
July 2000
02
January 2003
Revised content
Original production
Page 73: Description on connections added under Connecting to CS1-series CPU
Units.
Page 185: Setting range of 0 to 10 seconds corrected to 1 to 10 seconds under
Setting the Time-out Interval and “00” deleted from the sequence in the bottom
graphic.
Page 224: Description on error display under Reference changed.
Page 235: One row about the numeral display or numeral input field added to the
table.
Page 269: Indications inside connector graphics corrected and a note about the
use of shielding wire added to each graphic.
03
June 2004
CS1 was changed to CS, and the abbreviation for Programmable Controllers was unified to PLC.
The following changes were also made.
Page 5: Added new models to table.
Page 7: Added information on backlight color. Also added details on battery replacement for new models.
Page 17: Added information on backlight replacement for new models.
Page 23: Corrected and added information on reference manuals to table.
Page 29: Added new models to table.
Page 33: Changed information in table on power supply specifications.
Page 39: Added new models to introduction.
Page 59: Corrected DIP switch setting for SW3–6 from “ON” to “OFF” in graphic.
Page 79: Added CS-series PLC to graphic.
Page 82: Added information on cables for CS-series CPU Units.
Page 90: Removed information on cables with connectors.
Page 91: Added information on cables for CS-series CPU Units.
Page 150: Added information on System Installer mode versions.
Page 193: Added information on backlight brightness.
Page 223: Added and corrected information on CS1G/CS1H PLCs.
Page 224: Corrected “can” to “cannot” in note.
Page 241: Added information on backlight replacement for new models.
Page 242: Added information on backlight replacement for new models, and
changed model numbers.
Page 243: Changed “NT31/NT31C” to “PT” in text and changed model numbers in
graphic.
Page 246: Changed and added information in table on power supply voltage and
backlight brightness.
Pages 247 and 248: Changed specifications tables to add information on new
models.
Pages 275, 276, and 277: Added new models
Page 281: Removed information on SJ cables with connectors.
Page 283: Changed PT models that support replaceable backlights.
293
OMRON Corporation
FA Systems Division H.Q.
66 Matsumoto
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511
Japan
Tel: (81)55-977-9181/Fax: (81)55-977-9045
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. V062-E1-03
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.
Printed in Japan
Cat. No. V062-E1-03
NT31, NT31C Programmable Terminals
SETUP MANUAL
">